Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 688

Technical

Publications

2202123
Revision 35

CT HiSpeed Series
Functional Check /Adjustment

Copyrighte 1998–2002 by General Electric Company

Operating Documentation
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.


WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.


AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN


ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.


AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.

a
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA


DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE


SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

b
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION


X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should
be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this
equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and
cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no
practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to
take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,
and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT


All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required.

In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

c
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.

Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At
this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item
damaged and extent of damage.

Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this documentation.
Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.

CAUTION

Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause
this equipment to malfunction.

Devices not to be used near this equipment:

Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as; cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radio–controlled toy, etc.

Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.

Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients and other people who may be
around this equipment to fully comply with the above regulation.

d
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Tab – Section Page REV Rotational Mechanism 2–1 to 2–24 20

– Title page 35 Rotational Operation 3–1 to 3–7 19


Title page rear blank Slip Rings and Brushes 4–1 to 4–20 19

(Warning and other impor- a to d 19 Tilt Operation 5–1 to 5–15 19


tant information) Collimator 6–1 to 6–14 33
(Revision Information) A to D 35 Table and Gantry 7–1 to 7–20 22

1 (Introduction) i 35 5 (Table) i 30

General 1–1 to 1–7 22 Elevation Function 1–1 to 1–6 19


Torque Value for Screw Tightening 2–1 to 2–5 19 Longitudinal Function 2–1 to 2–16 34
Common Procedures 3–1 to 3–34 35 Short Foot Print Function 3–1 to 3–3 19

2 (System) i to v 28 6 (DAS/Detector) i 19

Checks during System Installation 1–1 to 1–19 32 DAS Operation 1–1 to 1–7 33
Software Loading (For V/R 5.5 or 2–1 to 2–68 35 DC Power Supply 2–1 to 2–2 19
later)
7 (X–ray Generator) i 24
Software Loading (For V/R 5.xx) 3–1 to 3–64 25
X–ray Tube 1–1 to 1–5 33
Software Loading (For V/R 4.xx) 4–1 to 4–77 25
KV and mA 2–1 to 2–9 33
Software Loading (For V/R 3.xx or 5–1 to 5–44 25
Lower) 8 (Switch/Jumper Setting) i to ii 35
X–ray Alignment 6–1 to 6–47 30 Operator Console 1–1 to 1–30 35
System Calibration 7–1 to 7–13 25 Gantry 2–1 to 2– 21 34
Image Performance Verification 8–1 to 8–12 28 DAS 3–1 to 3–4 20
3 (Operator Console) i 19 X–ray Generator 4–1 to 4–16 19
OC Components 1–1 to 1–11 19 PDU 5–1 to 5–2 28

OC Operation 2–1 to 2–12 33 Appendix


4 (Gantry) i to ii 29 Symbols and Classification A–1 to A–4 19

DC Power Supplies 1–1 to 1–3 19 – Blank/Rear cover –

A
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

REVISION HISTORY

REV Date Primary Reason for Change


35 12/13/02 Introduction Added: Table Home Lock (sec. 3)

System Added: V7 LFC Information (sec. 2)

Switch/Jumper Added: NPRM JP19 information (sec. 1).

34 09/20/02 System Added: A note for InSite Installation (Sec. 2).

Table Added: Information of the Home Lock function (Sec 2)

Switch/Jumper Added: TGP T5 setting (sec 2)

33 07/03/02 Introduction Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 3)

OC Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 2)

Gantry Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 6)

Table Added: Part No. of Adjustment Tool for Cradle Belt Tension

DAS Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 1)

XG Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 1, 2)

32 04/19/02 System Changed: X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY (sec1)

31 03/01/02 System Added: V/R 6.00 InSite Software for LFC (sec2)

30 12/21/01 System Changed: POR, ISO Center Alingment (sec6)

Table Added: Cradle Belt Tension

X–ray Generator Changed: MA check (sec2)

29 11/22/01 Gantry Changed: Collimator Aperture ratio for Twin system (sec 6)

28 10/05/01 System Changed: Image Performance Specifications (sec 8)


Changed: LFC for V/R 6 (sec2)

DAS Changed: scan parameters for DAS Data transfer test

Switch/Jumper Added: RMT CNT board for PDU2

27 08/10/01 System Added: V/R 6 System software loading (sec 2)


Changed: Gravity SAG procedure for NXi (sec 6)

Switch / Jumper Added: JP19 (NPRM) jumper setting


Changed: S1 (NPRM) switch setting

26 07/06/01 System Changed: Image Performance Specification (sec 8)

Switch / Jumper Added: NPRM board (sec1)

25 04/20/01 Introduction Changed: Asymmetric Option calibration (sec 3)


Added: Patch Software Procedure (sec3)

System Changed: Entry limitation for Reconfiguration (sec2, 3, 4, 5)


Added : For V5.5 patch procedure (sec 2)
Added: Alignment procedures for Twin (Sec 6)
Added: Asymmetric option note for CT # (sec 7)
Added: Saving ConnectPro parameters (sec 2, 3, 4)

B
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

REVISION HISTORY (continued)


REV Date Primary Reason for Change
24 03/09/01 Introduction Added: . Option installation for V/R 5.5 (Sec3)

System Added: V/R 5.5 or later software loading (sec2)


Added: Machine number notice (sec 3, 4, 5)

X–ray Generator Corrected: DAS Count Check

Switch / Jumper Changed: TGP Board (Sec2), DTRF Board (Sec 2), CIF Board (Sec 3)

23 12/22/00 Introduction Added: Gantry service angle caution (Sec3)

22 10/27/00 Introduction Minor corrections: Sec. 1.


Added: System state data backup at Option software loading (Sec3)

System Corrected: Bow–tie filter at Adjustment (Sec5, sec6), Laser Imager option setting in the system
configuration (Sec, 2, 3, 4)

DAS/Detector Added: DAS data transfer note,

X–ray Generator Corrected: Max of Max data for DAS Count Check
Added: BS3 or later Gantry for DAS count check

Switch / Jumper Added : New HDD,

21 09/14/00 System Added: . Aurora Information for LFC V4


. . . . . . . . Selection window at LFW for V5 and V4

20 08/18/00 System Improved: Diagnosis settings (LFC–sec2, 3, 4)


Changed: HDD format procedures (LFC–sec2, 3, 4)
Changed: Image Performance table for NX/i, NX/i pro

Gantry Changed 2–3 Rotation Balance.

Switch/Jumper Corrected : CIF SW2 (DAS)

19 07/06/00 – –

Introduction Added a torque conversion table.

System Updated: Linearity Test for calibration, G–SAG, ISO Center, Filter Alignment, Radial Alignment
(Bow–tie filter removal added), HDD labeling Procedures.

Operator Console Adopted the new revision control.

Gantry Corrected Aperture Z–Axis Belt Tension.

Table Adopted the new revision control.

DAS/Detector Changed the DAS Data Transfer Test parameter (No. of Scan).

X–ray Generator Updated the DAS Count Check parameter (Scan Time).

Switch/Jumper Adopted the new revision control.

18 6/02/00 – Software Loading for V5 Dicom print

17 5/19/00 – Image Performance check Table, Software Loading V5, HSDCD Slip Ring

16 5/10/00 – HSDCD Slip Ring updated, Software Loading (V4 format command),

15 2/25/00 – New rawdata HDD, Software Loading (DICOM Print Info.), Aperture Ratio, Radial Alignment Tool,
Gravity SAG, HSDCD Slip Ring, HSDCD Receiver Position

14 2/04/00 – Software Loading (DICOM print camera AE title, others), OGP setting, Option software

13 12/20/99 – Software Loading (ESR info. added), Gantry rear cover belt for mobile system, DAS Offset Data,
Aperture Ratio, DAS Count Check, BOW, G–SAG, Q–Cal, Sample images, KV Check,

C
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

REVISION HISTORY (continued)


REV Date Primary Reason for Change
12 10/19/99 – Software Loading for V4, Added items of NP++, NPRIF jumper setting

11 8/13/99 – System Calibration, DAS Count Check, Table/Gantry Interlock, Aperture Ratio, KV and mA, Step-
ping Motor Torque, CIF board switch setting, MOD switch/jumper setting, Sony MOD, Added
items of Mobile System.

10 5/28/99 – Gantry Section Error Correction, NPRM switch setting, Software loading, Rev–up procedures for
Ver 2.54, HDD format procedures.

9 4/05/99 – Option software Installation, Check Prior to Applying Power Ground Continuity, Added Warning,
Table Section Error Correction, Software loading

8 2/26/99 – Signal Brush Contact, Software loading, Power Load distribution Check, DAS CIF board switch
setting.

7 1/06/99 – KV–mA stations, System configuration, System software V/R2.5 release, Slip Ring Cleaning,
Radial Alignment

6 11/27/98 – Software loading, Notice for TGP service switches, TGP dip switch descriptions, short–foot–print-
mode, Slip Ring Radial Position

5 10/30/98 – Software loading, Rotation Balance, Slip Ring Radial Position, Tilt Rollers, Table Height Check/
Adjustment,

4 8/31/98 – Clearance between rotational and stationary components, RMT CNT jumper setting, CRT gamma
value, Auto Voice, Japanese era selection

3 7/10/98 – FCA error message, Cradle Notice, H/W diag SCSI test modification, IMS Position, Jumper/
switch settings of RMT CNT, TBL BD, TGP, SUB BD, Cradle relative position check,

2 5/15/98 – Table height spec., NPRIF Rev 1, PCI Host Card, Image Performance Check, DAS Count spec.,
Japanese message, Scan test, Gravity SAG, System Calibration, KV–mA checks, Software Load-
ing, MOD jumper setting,

1 4/10/98 – MA load resister specs, Serial Port Expander switch setting, .

0 4/01/98 – Initial release.

D
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

INTRODUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-1-1 Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-1-2 Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2 HARDWARE CONSTITUTION OF NP, NP+, NP++ AND TWIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-3 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

SECTION 2 – TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 NORMAL SCREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-2 HEXAGON SCREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5

SECTION 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 HOW TO REMOVE GANTRY COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 INSTALLING GANTRY COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-2-2 Gantry Service Angle Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-3 HOW TO REMOVE OC COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-4 REMOVAL OF PDU COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3-5 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-5-1 Saving System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-5-2 Restoring System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3-5-3 Displaying the SMPTE image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3-5-4 Performing the System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later 3–15
3-5-6 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.0x or lower 3–28
3-5-7 Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30
3-5-7 Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
Patch Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
3-6 GANTRY SWITCH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
3-7 TABLE HOME LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33

i INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

ii INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 22 2202123

SECTION 1 – GENERAL

BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL


This CT system is especially dangerous because its heavy gantry continuously rotates at a high speed with high power
electric current (380 ∼ 480 VAC) conducted through its slip rings.
The hazards, although sometimes obvious, need to be recognized since the potential for serious injury or death exists.

WARNING
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY !!
READ AND THOROUGHLY UNDERSTAND THE ‘HISPEED SERIES SAFETY
GUIDELINES/EMC’ MANUAL (2197417) BEFORE PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE IN THIS
‘FUNCTIONAL CHECK/ADJUSTMENT.’

Use of This Manual


Use this ‘Functional Check/Adjustment’ for the following purposes:

D A during– and post–installation check to ensure that the entire system operates properly.

D As a reference source for Periodic Maintenance which mainly contains abbreviated lists.

D A post–FMI (Field Modification Instruction) check to verify system operation.

D A pre–diagnostic check to verify or determine failure symptoms before or during troubleshooting.

D A post–diagnostic check to verify system operation after repairs, before returning it to the customer to use.

1–1 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 22 2202123

1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE

1-1-1 Gantry

WARNING
ROTATION AND ELECTROCUTION HAZARDS!
SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ AND ‘XG POWER (SAFETY LOOP)’ SWITCHES LOCATED AT
THE REAR OF THE GANTRY BASE BEFORE INSERTING ANY OBJECT INTO OR WORKING
ON THE GANTRY.

WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
ALWAYS INSERT THE GANTRY AZIMUTH LOCK PIN BEFORE REPLACING THE TUBE, DAS,
DETECTOR, HV TANK, OR OTHER WEIGHTY COMPONENTS.

WARNING
ELECTROCUTION!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON UNSHIELDED TERMINALS. USE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.

WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
ANY OF THE FOLLOWINGS WILL INITIATE THE GANTRY ROTATION:
1. POWERING ON THE SYSTEM OR GANTRY.
2. SWITCHING ON THE ‘TABLE/TILT’ SWITCH.
3. PUSHING THE RESET SWITCH ON THE TGP BOARD.
4. PUSHING THE POSITIONING LIGHT BUTTON.
5. RESETTING OR POWERING OFF THE HOST COMPUTER.
6. PUSHING THE RESET SWITCH ON THE DBPCI BOARD.
STAND CLEAR OF THE ROTATING GANTRY.

1–2 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 22 2202123

1-1-2 Operator Console

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER BEFORE
YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST ON EXPOSED SURFACES. USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.

CAUTION
Rotating fan assemblies!
Do not place any item into rotating blades. Use extra care when working near fan assemblies.

NOTICE
Turn OFF power before removing or inserting any board or plug.

1–3 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 22 2202123

1-2 HARDWARE CONSTITUTION OF NP, NP+, NP++ AND TWIN

Product Code Name


According to system models or customer options installed on the system, a number of system specifications or func-
tions available may differ from system to system; such are:

D Selectable scan times, MA values, FOV dimensions

D ‘Remote Tilt’ function

D Number of arrays of DAS/detector units, i.e., single or twin DAS/detector subsystem

D ...

However, the ‘HiSpeed’ series scanners are principally grouped into four, for which the following notations are given
respectively:
‘NP’, ‘NP+’, ‘NP++’ and ‘Twin’
In this manual, these notations NP, NP+, NP++, and Twin are used to describe differences among these four groups
and to make descriptions of this manual read simpler.

(However, ‘Twin’ is further grouped into two, that is, ‘NP+ Twin’ and ‘NP++ Twin’. In general outline,
NP+ Twin systems are NP/NP+ systems with a twin DAS/detector, and NP++ Twin systems are NP++ systems
with a twin DAS/detector. These code names also will be used when required.)

Table 1–1 describes the constitution of the major hardware of NP, NP+, NP++, Twin.

Table 1–1 Hardware Constitution

Subsystem/Component NP NP+ NP++ NP+ Twin NP++ Twin


OC – common
Gantry Mechanics – Position- Halogen Laser
ing Light Lamps
Mechanics – others common
Electrics Firmware only is different.
Table IMS Standard or Option Standard Standard or Standard
(Intermediate Support) Option
Others common
DAS – common twin DAS
Detector – common twin detector
X–ray Generator – common (Jedi) NP++ Jedi Jedi NP++ Jedi
X–ray Tube – common (D3142T tube) D3152T D3142T D3152T
tube tube tube
PDU – common

1–4 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 22 2202123

1-3 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES


Use the following conversion formula and table to change a unit suitable for a torque wrench you have.

[Coversion: kgfScm –> NSm]


Conversion Formula:
xx (NSm) = xxxx (kgfScm) x 0.098
Conversion Table:

1 kgfScm = 0.098 NSm


Coversion: kgfScm –> NSm
kgfScm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NSm
0 0 0.0981 0.1961 0.2942 0.3923 0.4903 0.5884 0.6865 0.7845 0.8826
10 0.9807 1.0787 1.1768 1.2748 1.3729 1.4710 1.5690 1.6671 1.7652 1.8632
20 1.9613 2.0594 2.1574 2.2555 2.3536 2.4516 2.5497 2.6478 2.7458 2.8439
30 2.9420 3.0400 3.1381 3.2361 3.3342 3.4323 3.5303 3.6284 3.7265 3.8245
40 3.9226 4.0207 4.1187 4.2168 4.3149 4.4129 4.5110 4.6091 4.7071 4.8052
50 4.9033 5.0013 5.0994 5.1974 5.2955 5.3936 5.4916 5.5897 5.6878 5.7858
60 5.8840 5.9820 6.0800 6.1781 6.2762 6.3742 6.4723 6.5704 6.6684 6.7665
70 6.8646 6.9626 7.0607 7.1587 7.2568 7.3549 7.4529 7.5510 7.6491 7.7474
80 7.8452 7.9433 8.0413 8.1394 8.2375 8.3355 8.4336 8.5317 8.6297 8.7278
90 8.8260 8.9239 9.0220 9.1200 9.2181 9.3162 9.4142 9.5123 9.6104 9.7084
100 9.8065

1–5 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 22 2202123

1-3 Torque Conversion Tables (Continued)

[Coversion: NSm –> kgfScm]


Conversion Formula:
xx (kgfScm) = xxxx (NSm) x 10.2
Conversion Table:

1 NSm = 10.2 kgfScm


Coversion: NSm –> kgfScm
NSm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
kgfScm
0 0 10 20 31 41 51 61 71 82 92
10 102 112 122 133 143 153 163 173 184 194
20 204 214 224 235 245 255 265 275 286 296
30 306 316 326 337 347 357 367 377 388 398
40 408 418 428 439 449 459 469 479 490 500
50 510 520 530 541 551 561 571 581 592 602
60 612 622 632 643 653 663 673 683 694 704
70 714 724 734 745 755 765 775 785 796 806
80 816 826 836 847 857 867 877 887 898 908
90 918 928 938 949 959 969 979 989 1000 1010
100 1020

1–6 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 22 2202123

1-3 Torque Conversion Tables (Continued)

[Coversion: NSm –> lbfSft]


Conversion Formula:
xx (lbfSft) = xxxx (NSm) x 0.737
xx (NSm) = xxxx (lbfSft) x 1.356
Conversion Table:

1 NSm=0.737 lbfSft
Coversion: NSm –> lbfSft
NSm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
lbfSft
0 0 0.737 1.474 2.211 2.948 3.685 4.422 5.159 5.896 6.633
10 7.370 8.107 8.844 9.581 10.318 11.055 11.792 12.529 13.266 14.003
20 14.740 15.477 16.214 16.951 17.688 18.425 19.162 19.899 20.636 21.373
30 22.110 22.847 23.584 24.321 25.058 25.795 26.532 27.269 28.006 28.743
40 29.480 30.217 30.954 31.691 32.428 33.165 33.902 34.639 35.376 36.113
50 36.850 37.587 38.324 39.061 39.798 40.535 41.272 42.009 42.746 43.483
60 44.220 44.957 45.694 46.431 47.168 47.905 48.642 49.379 50.116 50.853
70 51.590 52.327 53.064 53.801 54.538 55.275 56.012 56.749 57.486 58.223
80 58.960 59.697 60.434 61.171 61.908 62.645 63.382 64.119 64.856 65.593
90 66.330 67.067 67.804 68.541 69.278 70.015 70.752 71.489 72.226 72.963
100 73.700

1–7 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

1–8 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

SECTION 2 – TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING

CAUTION
Use locktite for screws which are installed to the Gantry rotation block. Use stud bolt with
locktite or nylon nut to prevent loosening if a screw is removed in service maintenance.

CAUTION
When you secure stud bolts with locktite, you must keep the screw torque shown in Table
‘Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite.’
Do not rotate the Gantry until the locktite hardens. (75 % of maximum strength after 2 hours;
100 % after 16 hours.)

If it is not possible to wait for the time period mentioned above, use nylon nuts.

TABLE 2–1 Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm]


(Unless other-
wise specified)
M4 10
M5 15
M6 35
M8 70

2–1 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

2-1 NORMAL SCREWS


Secure normal screws with the tightening torque shown in the following tables unless otherwise specified.

TABLE 2–2 Pan Head Screw

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)


Brass Steel (4.8) Stainless (Combination)
(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut)
M1 0.17 0.18 0.22 If screw and nut
are of different
M 1.2 0.32 0.34 0.42 material, use the
M 1.4 0.49 0.52 0.65 weakest torque.

M 1.7 0.90 0.96 1.2


M2 1.5 1.6 1.9
M 2.2 1.9 2.0 2.5
M 2.3 2.3 2.5 3.1
M 2.5 3.0 3.2 4.0
M 2.6 3.4 3.6 4.5
M3 5.3 5.7 7.1
M 3.5 8.2 8.7 11
M4 12 13 16
M 4.5 17.5 19 23.5
M5 24.5 26.5 33
M6 41.5 44 55
M8 101 108 135

Style

2–2 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

TABLE 2–3 Binder Screw

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)


Brass Steel (4.8) Stainless (Combination)
(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut)
M1 – – – If screw and nut
are of different
M 1.2 – – – material, use the
M 1.4 – – – weakest torque.

M 1.7 – – –
M2 1.6 1.7 2.1
M 2.2 2.0 2.2 2.7
M 2.3 2.5 2.7 3.4
M 2.5 3.2 3.4 4.2
M 2.6 3.6 3.9 4.8
M3 5.6 6.0 7.5
M 3.5 8.7 9.3 11.5
M4 13 13.5 17
M 4.5 18.5 20 25
M5 26 27.5 34.5
M6 44 47 58.5
M8 107 114 143

Style

2–3 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

TABLE 2–4 Flat Head Screw

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)


Brass Steel (4.8) Stainless (Combination)
(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut)
M1 0.21 0.22 0.27 If screw and nut
are of different
M 1.2 0.39 0.42 0.52 material, use the
M 1.4 0.61 0.65 0.82 weakest torque.

M 1.7 1.1 1.2 1.5


M2 1.9 2.0 2.5
M 2.2 2.4 2.6 3.2
M 2.3 3.0 3.2 4.0
M 2.5 3.8 4.1 5.1
M 2.6 4.4 4.6 5.8
M3 6.8 7.2 9.0
M 3.5 10.5 11 14
M4 15.5 16.5 20.5
M 4.5 22.5 24 30
M5 31.5 33.5 42
M6 53 56.5 71
M8 130 139 173
Style

2–4 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

2-2 HEXAGON SCREWS


Tighten allen (hexagonal) screws with the torque shown in Table below unless otherwise specified.

TABLE 2–5 Hexagon Screw

Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)


Ferrite Aluminum Aluminum Steel (Combination)
(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) Alloy
(Screw & Nut)
M4 35 28 17.5 If screw and nut
are of different
M5 70 56 35 material, use the
M6 117 96.3 58.5 weakest torque.

M8 285 228 142.5


M 10 563 450.4 281.5
M 12 976 780.8 488

Style

or

L L

2–5 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

2–6 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

SECTION 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES

3-1 HOW TO REMOVE GANTRY COVERS

3-1-1 Gantry Front Cover Removal


1. Remove the four screw caps from the sides of the front cover, then install the four service angle studs onto the
Gantry front cover.

2. Attach the two service angles to the studs.

3. Remove the four front cover mounting bolts, then move the front cover forwards.

4. For the Mobile system ONLY:


Loosen the four service angle stud mounting screws and lift up the front cover all the way, then tighten the screws.

Illustration 3–1 Attaching the Service Angles

For the Mobile system ONLY:

SERVICE
STUDS ANGLE

3–1 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-1-1 Gantry Front Cover Removal (Continued)


5. Slightly disengage the front cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors
of the FCV BD Assy of the front cover.

D CN1

D CN8

6. Connect the Gantry control panel cable to the inner gantry display board (SDS BD CN1).

Illustration 3–2 Removing the Front Cover from the Frame

FCV BD

SDS BD
CN1

GANTRY FRONT COVER

7. For the Mobile system ONLY:


Move the table to the UP limit, then move the front cover forward as far as possible to get efficient service area.

3–2 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-1-1 Gantry Front Cover Removal (Continued)

Gantry Front Cover Removal for a Small Room (with Short–Foot–Print Mode)
Note
Use this method when table height will be set to 500 ~ 800 mm.

1. Set the Gantry to the 0 degree tilt position.

2. Move the cradle to the OUT limit position.

3. Move the table to the DOWN limit position.

4. Cover the cradle with a cloth (or cover protector: 2225358) on the to prevent the front cover from scratches or
damage.

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ Cloth

ÍÍ
ÍÍ

5. Remove the four screw caps from the sides of the front cover, then install the four service angle studs onto the
Gantry front cover.

6. Attach the two service angles to the studs.

7. Slightly disengage the front cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors
of the FCV BD Assy of the front cover. See Illustration 3–2.

D CN1

D CN8

8. Connect the Gantry control panel cable to the inner gantry display board (SDS BD CN1).

9. Switch ON the service switch, then rotate the Gantry manually so that the X–ray tube is set to 6 o’clock position.

10. Switch OFF the service switch.

3–3 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-1-1 Gantry Front Cover Removal (Continued)


11. Lift up the front cover, then contact the cover to the edge of the cradle and rotate it toward the cradle so that it
stays on the cradle.

NOTICE
Take care not to damage any Gantry Parts (especially the positioning light) when rotating the
front cover toward the cradle.

3–4 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-1-2 Gantry Rear Cover Removal


IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the Mobile system ONLY:
Since the rear cover is fixed using the rear cover belt, release the tensioner and open the
buckle to remove the belt before removing the rear cover. For Belt Installation, refer to Instal-
lation, Section 10–8–2 Cover Installation.

1
Releasing the Belt.

1. To install the service angles to the rear cover, repeat steps 1 to 3 (Front Cover Removal).
Note
The special service angles (Part No. 2213844) can be used for the Gantry installed in a small room.
2. Slightly disengage the rear cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors of
the RCV BD Assy of the rear cover.
D CN1
D CN9
3. Connect the Gantry control panel cables to the dummy connector of the inner gantry display board.

Illustration 3–3 Removing the Rear Cover from the Frame

Gantry
RCV BD Frame

Dummy Connec-
tor
CN1

Gantry Rear Cover

3–5 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-1-3 Gantry Side Cover Removal


1. For the left side cover:
Remove the two mounting bolts and move the cover forward or rearward to remove the cover.

2. For the right side cover:

a. Remove the two mounting bolts.

b. Move the cover forward from the Gantry until the safety switch connector is visible.

c. Disconnect the safety switch connector, then remove the cover.

Illustration 3–4 Removing the Side Cover from the Frame

Right Side Cover

ÁÁ
ÁÁ

Safety Switch
Connector

3–6 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-1-4 Safety Switch Setting


1. Move the Gantry safety switches DOWNWARD so that the Gantry can rotate.

Illustration 3–5 Safety Switch Setting

Front Rear 1 Gantry Front 2 Gantry Rear


Safety Switch Safety Switch

2 3 Gantry Right Side


1
Safety Switch
3 Bracket

Screw

3-2 INSTALLING GANTRY COVERS

3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice


When installing the Gantry covers, verify that:

D The azimuth locking pin should be disengaged.

D The Gantry tilt lock(s) should be removed.

D All safety switches (three) should be released.

D The safety switch connector should be connected properly to the right side cover.

D The connectors (CN1 and CN9) should be connected properly to the RCV BD on the rear cover.

D The connectors (CN1 and CN8) should be connected properly to the FCV BD on the front cover.

3–7 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice (Continued)

NOTICE
When installing the Gantry front cover, first cover the front edge of the cradle with a cloth
to prevent the front cover from scratches or damage.

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ Cloth

ÍÍ
ÍÍ

3-2-2 Gantry Service Angle Caution

CAUTION
If the service angles (cover stand) fall over, they can injure persons. Therefore, after using the
service angles, keep them in a safe place and/or secure them from falling over even when the
customer or other persons accidentally hit the service angles.

3–8 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-3 HOW TO REMOVE OC COVERS


Remove the front and rear covers to allow access to OC inner wiring. (To remove the rear cover, the optical cable
holder must be removed.)

Illustration 3–6 OC Cover Removal

OPTICAL CABLE HOLDER

REAR COVER

FRONT COVER

3–9 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-4 REMOVAL OF PDU COVERS


1. Verify that the main breaker of the Power Distribution Box should be OFF.

2. Remove the front cover, top cover, and left side cover, and right side cover in this order.

Illustration 3–7 Removing the PDU Covers

2
NUTS
4
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
3 1
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ SCREWS

SCREWS

3–10 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5 BASIC OPERATION

3-5-1 Saving System State Data


The basic system data (System State data) must be saved in advance in case the System Hard Disk Drive in the OC is
broken.

Note
The following will be saved as a system state data.
– Option key information
– Log files (log for success/failure when saving/restoring software sets)
– Scan protocol files
– IOS preferences
– Calibration files
– Autovoice files
– Next patient exam number
– User preferences
– InSite information
– Tube usage information
– Crosstalk A, B channel data (For Twin only)
– TnT Definition File log (For Twin only)
– Q cal channel ratio (For Twin only)

Preparation
D One MOD

Procedures (Method I)
1. Verify that the system is powered ON. If it is not, switch ON the main switch of the OC. The system is started
up, then the main screen appears.

2. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.

3. Click on Service menu icon.

4. Select Savestate.

5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

3–11 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-1 Saving System State Data (Continued)

Procedures (Method II)


1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown.

2. Click on Savestate.

3. “Insert mod and press confirm.” appears. Click on Continue.

4. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.

5. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

Note
At this time, you can cancel system–state–data saving procedure. If “Continue” is selected, this pro-
cedure can NOT be canceled.

6. “Warning: Saving System state will erase the previous contents.” appears. Click on Continue.

7. “System state saved successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

3-5-2 Restoring System State Data

Procedures (For the system with V/R 3.xx or later)


1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown.

2. Click on Restorestate.

3. “Insert mod and press confirm.” appears. Click on Continue.

4. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 3-5-1, into the MOD drive.

5. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

Note
At this time, you can cancel system–state–data reloading procedure. If “Continue” is selected, this
procedure can NOT be canceled.

6. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.

7. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

8. To remove the MOD from the MOD drive, press the Eject button on the MOD drive.

9. Select Startup to return to the scan panel screen.

3–12 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-2 Restoring System State Data (Continued)

Procedures (For the system with V/R 2.xx or lower)


1. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 3-5-1, into the MOD drive.

2. Click on Console icon.

3. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

# cd /usr/g/scripts <Enter>

# savestate –r <Enter>

4. Click on Continue.

5. “System State Restored Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

6. To remove the MOD from the MOD drive, press the Eject button on the MOD drive.

3-5-3 Displaying the SMPTE image


1. Select Service → Install SMPTE image (To install the SMPTE image on the system.)

2. Click on ImageWorks → Browser to display the examination list.

3. Select “SMPTE” image in the Examination list.

4. Click on Viewer to display the SMPTE pattern.

5. Enlarge the SMPTE image to full screen display, using Format → Full screen format .
If necessary, drag the Zoom slider to display the pattern to the full screen.

3–13 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-4 Performing the System Configuration


1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown.

2. On the desktop menu, click on Reconfig button located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration menu appears.
Using this screen, perform configuration.

NOTICE
The characters of alphanumerics, underscore, and period ONLY can be used. If other charac-
ters would be used, the system will not start up. (For the system of V/R 2.5 or later, other
characters are rejected to input even if they are input.)

3. Click on Accept after completing the configuration.


The system shuts down, then starts up automatically.

3–14 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later
The following tables shows the hierarchical menu (buttons) to install the Option software.

Buttons to be selected
Service Menu Option Installation Main Window Selection Window I Selection Window II
Install Options Install Permanent MOD
Manual
Quit
Flex Trial
Quit
Remove
Quit

1. Click on Service icon to display the Service desktop Menu, then select Application Shutdown.

2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Options button located on the upper right of the screen.

3–15 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
The “CT Software Options” screen appears.

3. Click on Install.

Note
If you click on an option in the list, the option is highlighted and “Install” button is disabled. In this
case, enter the cursor in the option screen, then click on the right button of the mouse to enable the
“Install” button.

3–16 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
4. Select either Permanent or Flex Trial.

D Permanent: selected when a customer purchased the option formally.

D Flex Trial: selected when a customer uses the option within a fixed time period as a trial. (The message
that notices the expiration date will be displayed over 10 days before the expiration of a Flex Trial.)

3-5-5-1 When ‘Permanent’ is selected:


1. Select either MOD or Manual.

D MOD: selected when the Option key MOD is used at installation.

D Manual: selected when the licence string is used at installation. The licence string is an unique number
with 25 characters that you get from your OLC.

3–17 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
2. When MOD is selected:
The following screen appears. Insert the option key MOD into the MOD drive, then click on OK.

The “CT Software Options” screen appears.

3–18 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
a. Select the Option to be installed from the “Available Options” table.

Note
You can select several options from the list, while pressing the shift key.

b. Click on Install.
The option loading is started, then the message window appears after completion. The option(s) is displayed
in the “Installed Options” table.

Note
Just after clicking on Install, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
installed. In this case, a proper entry/selection must be performed. Refer to Option setup window
described in this section.

c. Click on OK.

d. Click on Quit.

e. Eject the option MOD from the MOD drive.

f. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.

3. When Manual is selected:


The following screen appears.

a. Enter the licence string in the box, then click on Accept. The licence string is an unique number with 25 char-
acters that you get from your OLC.

Note
Just after clicking on Accept, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
installed. In this case, a proper entry/selection must be performed. Refer to Option setup window
described in this section.

3–19 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
b. The option loading is started, then the following window appears.
Click on OK.

c. The “CT Software Options” screen appears.


Verify that the option to be installed is displayed in the list as a ‘permanent’ mode.

3–20 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
d. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.

e. Click on Quit.

4. Click on shutdown icon in desktop menu. The system is rebooted.

5. Select Startup to return to the scan panel screen.

6. Perform Section 3-5-1, Saving System State Data for backup.

3-5-5-2 When ‘Flex Trial’ is selected:


1. Enter the licence string in the box. The licence string is an unique number with 25 characters that you get from
your OLC.

2. Click on Accept.

Note
Just after clicking on Accept, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
installed. In this case, a proper entry/selection must be performed. Refer to Option setup window
described in this section.

3. The option loading is started, then the following window appears.


Click on OK.

3–21 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
4. The “CT Software Options” screen appears.
Verify that the option to be installed is displayed in the list as a ‘Flex Trial’ mode.

Note
‘Days left’ means the remaining days when a customer can use the option as a trial. This number
counts down day by day, then the option will disappear from the option list when ‘Days left’ becomes
0.
When the flex–trial option has expired and the [New Patient] button is clicked, the Option Status Log
window appears so that a customer can know the expired flex–trial option.

5. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.

6. Click on Quit.

7. Click on shutdown icon in desktop menu. The system is rebooted.

8. Select Startup to return to the scan panel screen.

9. Perform Section 3-5-1, Saving System State Data for backup.

3–22 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)

Option Setup Windows


D Asymmetric Option:
Select the Asymmetric mode, then click on Accept.

Asymmetric Mode Meanings


10:1 Provides 10 mm and 1 mm slices.
10:2 Provides 10 mm and 2 mm slices.
6:1 Provides 6 mm and 1 mm slices.

Then after setting the Asymmetric mode, perform the following in this order.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
The following BOW is performed only to warm up the X–ray tube. So, do NOT adjust the De-
tector position even if the results go out of tolerance.

D BOW
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> BOW –> OK –> Confirm.

D Q–cal Channel Ratio:


Perform Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> Qcal Channel Ratio –>OK –> Confirm.

D Calibration:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Service Calibration –> Asymmetric Seq.

D CT # Adjustment:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> CT # Adjustment.

3–23 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
D Denta Option:
1. Power ON a camera connected to the CT system.
2. “The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera ...” message appears. Enter y
3. “Please select a printer in the list....” message appears. Select a proper printer.
4. Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film. (See the Note below.)
5. “Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous step. (See
the Note below.)
6. Click on Quit –> OK.

Note
Entry must be integer and performed in unit of mm.
Round off the first decimal place to the integer. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch
value to mm value using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm” .

3–24 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
D ConnectPro Option:
The ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters, then click on Accept.

Items Meanings
HIS Server IP Address Enter IP address of HIS Server.
HIS Server AE Title Enter AE Title of HIS Server.
HIS Server AE Port# Enter port# which is used to communicate with HIS Server. Default value
is 4008. You can use any number if it has consistency with HIS Server
and exclusive with other protocols.
CT Server AE Title The name of CT Scanner. Suggest to set Host name.
Note: According to a person who can take the responsibilities as a system (network) administra-
tor for the internal network system at the site. The person will be responsible for providing the
preinstallation network information.
Attention: AE Title of both of HIS Server and CT Scanner should be unique in the network.
You need to talk with network administrator to define these title.

3–25 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
For V/R 5.5 or later ONLY and for a hospital with PPS sever ONLY:
Next, the PPS Server setup window appears. Enter the parameters, then click on Accept.

Items Meanings
PPS Server IP Address Enter IP address of PPS Server.
PPS Server AE Title Enter AE Title of PPS Server.
PPS Server AE Port# Enter port# which is used to communicate with PPS Server. Default
value is 4500. You can use any number if it has consistency with PPS
Server and exclusive with other protocols.
CT Server AE Title The name of CT Scanner. Suggest to set Host name.
Note: According to a person who can take the responsibilities as a system (network) administra-
tor for the internal network system at the site. The person will be responsible for providing the
preinstallation network information.
Attention: AE Title of both of PPS Server and CT Scanner should be unique in the network.
You need to talk with network administrator to define these title.

3–26 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
D Raw Data 1000 Max Option:
The following message appears. Click on OK .

3–27 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-6 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.0x or lower
1. Click on Service icon to display the Service desktop Menu, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down.

2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Options button located on the upper right of the screen.

3. Insert the option MOD into the MOD drive, then click on OK.

The “CT Software Options” screen appears.

3–28 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-6 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.0x or lower (Continued)
4. Select the Option to be installed using “Available Options” box.

5. Click on Install.
The option loading is started, then the option installed is displayed at “Installed Option” box.

Note
Just after clicking on Install, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
installed. In this case, a proper entry/selection must be performed. Refer to Section 3-5-5, Installing
an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later, Option setup window.

6. Click on Quit.

7. Click on OK.

8. Eject the option MOD from the MOD drive.

9. When other option(s) is installed, repeat steps 2 to 8 above.

10. Click on shutdown icon in desktop menu. The system is rebooted.

11. Select Startup to return to the scan panel screen.

12. Perform Section 3-5-1, Saving System State Data for backup.

For Denta Scan Option on the System V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY:
13. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> unix shell.

14. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% su<Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> /user/g/ctuser/install/installcamera.denta <Enter>
Sending a film to the camera.

Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm): <Enter>

The Laser camera will eject a test film.

15. Measure the distance (unit: mm) between two lines printed on the test film and enter it in the shell window.

16. Verify that “DentaScan filming option installed” message appears.

17. Enter Exit to terminate the shell.

For Extended Raw Data Option on the System V/R 3.xx or V/R 4.00 ONLY:

NOTICE
If the Extended Raw Data Option is installed after the LFC procedures, it might appears that
the installation completed successfully, but the actual space of the raw data does NOT in-
crease with the system . Therefore, to install this option, perform the LFC first, then install
it just before starting up system of the last phase of the LFC.

3–29 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-7 Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Revision–up (Patch) Software

Loading Software
1. Click on Service icon to display the Service desktop Menu, then select Application Shutdown.

2. Insert the CD–ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

3. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software located on the upper right of the screen.

4. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” window appears. Click on Yes.

5. “Following patch software will be installed” window appears. Click on Yes.


The patch installation procedures are automatically started.

6. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful.” window.

Note
Some patch softwares might require reboot (shown below). If it does, when clicking on OK, the sys-
tem automatically reboots and pauses at the desktop menu.

Software Package Installation

Software Package Installation

7. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell on the upper right of the screen.

3–30 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-5-7 Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software (Continued)


8. Type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

Patch Verification
1. Click on List S/W Package.
2. Click on Patch.
3. Verify that information for the patch installed are displayed. (Example)
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Patch NPP5x00x: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 5.xx
Patch NPP5x00y: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 5.xy
************************************************************************

4. Click on Close.
5. Click on shutdown to reboot the system. Verify that the system starts up with no error.

3–31 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-6 GANTRY SWITCH PANEL


The Gantry switch panels are located at upper right and left portion of the gantry front cover, and rear cover as option.
The key denomination is shown in the illustration below. Refer to Operator Manual for details.

Internal Landmark
External Landmark
Tilt Range & Scannable
Range Display
Positioning
Light

Table Up
Practice
Cradle Out
Cradle In
Table Down

IMS Move

Fast
Gantry Tilt

The Gantry service switches on the SDS board as shown in the Illustration below have the same function as the Gantry
switch panel. They are used when the Gantry front cover is removed.

Tilt Range & Scannable


External Landmark
Range Display
Positioning Internal Landmark
Light

Practice

IMS Move

Table Up

Table Down
Cradle In
Cradle Out Gantry Tilt
Fast
(BWD)
Gantry Tilt
(FWD)

3–32 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-7 TABLE HOME LOCK

Cradle Lock Assy


When performing the following check and adjustment, release the cradle lock using the release lever.

D CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION

Release Position Original Position

ÍÍ
ÍÍ Release Lever

Protect Cover

NOTICE
Do not forget to return the release lever. If it does not, the table will be damaged when moving
the cradle.

3–33 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

3-7 TABLE HOME LOCK (continued)

IMS Lock Assy


When performing the following check and adjustment, release the IMS lock using the release lever.

D IMS POSITION

ÈÈ Top Cover–L

Release Position Original Position

Release Lever

NOTICE
Do not forget to return the release lever. If it does not, the table will be damaged when moving
the IMS table.

3–34 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

SYSTEM

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER GROUND CONTINUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-3 TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1-6 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
1-7 EMERGENCY OFF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
1-8 FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
1-9 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
1-10 SCAN TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

SECTION 2 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 5.5 OR LATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
2-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
2-9-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
2-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2–AUXCONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
2-10-1 Initiating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
2-10-2 Restoring System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
2-10-3 Restoring Option Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
2-10-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
2-11 EDITING THE FILE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 5.50 ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
2-12 INSTALLING REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2-12-1 Loading revision–up software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2-12-2 Patch Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
2-13 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
2-14 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
2-14-1 Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
2-14-2 Completing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47

i SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION PAGE
2-15 OPTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
2-16 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–49
2-17 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-17-1 Restoring Patient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-17-2 Setting Gamma Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-17-3 Test Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-18 INSITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
2-18-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
2-18-2 Installing InSite Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
2-18-3 Setting up InSite Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54
2-18-4 Completing the insite installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–56
2-18-5 Saving InSite Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–56
2-19 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–57
2-19-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–57
2-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65
2-19-3 AutoFilm Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68

SECTION 3 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 5.0X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
3-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
3-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3-9-2 Restoring the System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2–AUXCONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3-10-1 Initiating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3-10-2 Restoring System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3-10-3 Restoring Option Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
3-10-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
3-11 INSTALLING REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3-11-1 Loading revision–up software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3-11-2 Patch Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3-12 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3-13 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3-13-1 Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3-13-2 Completing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
3-14 OPTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36
3-15 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37
3-16 SETTING DICOM PRINT CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38

ii SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION PAGE
3-17 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
3-17-1 Restoring Patient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
3-17-2 Setting CRT Gamma Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
3-17-3 Test Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
3-18 INSITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45
3-18-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45
3-18-2 Installing InSite software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45
3-18-3 Setting up InSite Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–48
3-18-4 Completing the insite installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–50
3-18-5 Saving InSite Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–50
3-19 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
3-19-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
3-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–59
3-20 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62
3-20-1 Entering the Machine Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62

SECTION 4 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 4.XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1


4-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4-5 RECORDING CAMERA DATA (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH CAMERA ONLY) . . . . . . 4–7
4-6 RECORDING INSITE INFORMATION (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH INSITE ONLY) . 4–9
4-7 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4-8 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4-9 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4-9-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4-9-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4-10 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4-10-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4-10-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4-11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
4-11-3 Restoring the System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
4-12 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2–AUXCONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
4-12-1 Initiating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
4-12-2 Restoring System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
4-12-3 Restoring Option Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27
4-12-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–28
4-13 INSTALLING REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29
4-13-1 Loading revision–up software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29
4-13-2 Patch Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–30
4-14 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
4-15 EDITING THE FILE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 4.0X ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32
4-16 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–34
4-16-1 Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–34
4-16-2 Completing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48
4-17 OPTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49
4-18 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–50

iii SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION PAGE
4-19 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
4-19-1 Restoring Patient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
4-19-2 Setting CRT Gamma Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
4-19-3 Test Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
4-20 INSITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
4-20-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
4-20-2 Installing InSite software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
4-20-3 Installing Proactive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–55
4-20-4 Health Page Installation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–56
4-20-5 Setting Up Modem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–57
4-20-6 Setting up InSite Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–60
4-20-7 Completing the insite installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–62
4-20-8 Saving InSite Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–62
4-21 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–63
4-21-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–63
4-21-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–71
4-22 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–74
4-22-1 The Reason Why the System State Data Must be Reloaded TWICE . . . . . 4–74
4-22-2 Entering the Machine Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–75

SECTION 5 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 3.XX OR LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1


5-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-3 SAVING CUSTOMER DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5-5 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5-6 DISCONNECTING THE SCSI CABLE FOR THE OPTIONAL PIONEER MOD DRIVE
(FOR V/R 3.XX OR LOWER SYSTEM ONLY) . 5–6
5-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5-8-3 Connecting the SCSI cable for the Optional Pioneer MOD Drive
(For v/r 3.xx or lower system only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5-9-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2 – AUXCONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
5-10-1 Initiating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
5-10-2 Restoring System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
5-10-3 Restoring Option Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–18
5-10-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–20
5-11 INSTALLING THE APPLICATION REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . 5–21
5-11-1 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 3.xx or Later) . . . 5–21
5-11-2 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 2.54 and 2.55) . . 5–23
5-11-3 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 2.53 or lower) . . 5–24

iv SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION PAGE
5-12 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25
5-12-1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25
5-13 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32
5-14 COMPLETING THE LFC/LFW PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33
5-15 SETTING CRT GAMMA VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–34
5-16 SELECTING AUTO VOICE LANGUAGE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 2.02 OR LOWER
ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
5-17 DISPLAYING JAPANESE MESSAGE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 1.20 ONLY) 5–36
5-18 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–37
5-18-1 How to format a System HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY) 5–37
5-18-2 How to format an Image HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY) 5–39
5-18-3 The Reason Why the System State Data Must be Reloaded TWICE . . . . . 5–41
5-18-4 Entering the Machine Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–42

SECTION 6 – X–RAY ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1


6-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6-4 PLANE OF ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15
6-4-1 POR Except for Twin system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15
6-4-2 POR for Twin System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
6-5 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26
6-5-1 BOW Except for Twin System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26
6-5-2 BOW for Twin System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–31
6-6 QCAL CHANNEL RATIO (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33
6-7 GRAVITY SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
6-7-1 G–SAG For HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i, and NX/i Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
6-7-2 G–SAG For HiSpeed DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
6-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
6-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42
6-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45

SECTION 7 – SYSTEM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1


7-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7-3 HILIGHT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7-3-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7-3-2 Q Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7-3-3 XT Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7-3-4 AV Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7-3-5 DG Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7-4 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7-5 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13

SECTION 8 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1


8-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4

v SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

vi SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

SECTION 1 – CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

1-1 GENERAL

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER BEFORE
YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.

This ‘Checks during System Installation’ is performed during the following:


System Installation
Periodic Maintenance.

For System Installation, it is required that all wiring and cabling are complete and equipment is installed.
Proceed to Section 1-2 ‘Checks prior to Applying Power’, and then, to Section 1-2 ‘Ground Continuity’, Section 1-3
‘Temperature,’ ... , in the section order.

1–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER GROUND CONTINUITY

CAUTION
Leave all power to the system OFF and tagged until power is called for in specific steps.

1. Verify the following:

a. Four Gantry Tilt Lock Plates are removed.

b. Gantry Azimuth Lock Pin is pulled out.

c. All of the following breakers and switches are OFF.

D Breaker on Power Distribution Box (hospital supply)

D 2 Breaker (CB1 or CB2) on the PDU

D 4 Switches (‘Rotate,’ ‘XG Power,’ ‘Table/Tilt,’and ’Slip Ring 115V’)

D Service switch on the Sub Board on the Gantry

D SYS–OFF–MNL switch on the TGP Board on the Gantry

D 2 Breakers (CB1 and CB2) on the OC

Illustration 1–1 PDU (Power Distribution Unit)

OFF

CB1 CB2

1–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER GROUND CONTINUITY (continued)

Illustration 1–2 Gantry

SERVICE
ON

SYS ABT SPD2 FAST CNT

HOME
SPD1
OFF

MID
SVE
OFF
SUB BOARD
MNL FIX SPD0 MID 90DEG

TGP BOARD

GANTRY LEFT SIDE

Illustration 1–3 Operator Console

CB1 AND CB2

OC REAR SIDE
TM1

1–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-3 TEMPERATURE
During the installation and start–up of the system you must take continuous temperature checks to make sure the
environment meets specifications listed in Section 3 of the Preinstallation manual. Excessive temperature, coupled
with reduced air flow from clogged filters, may overstress components and cause failures.

Filters
Check and clean all electronic equipment dust filters. GE recommends initially doing this on a weekly basis, because
new installations always have dust and dirt present at this stage. Over a period of time, you may increase the mainte-
nance interval as site environment improves.

Specifications
During installation, use the temperature/humidity recorder and a thermometer to record the temperature and relative
humidity in the scan room. Make sure the data you collect meets the following temperature and humidity
specifications.

D Scan Room

– Temperature: 20_ C ∼ 28_ C (at least 5_ C/hr gradient)

– Relative Humidity: 30 ∼ 70 % RH (Non Condensing)

D Operator’s Room and/or Equipment Room

– Temperature: 15_ C ∼ 30_ C (at least 5_ C/hr gradient)

– Relative Humidity: 20 ∼ 80 % RH (Non Condensing)

Action
Contact the air conditioning supplier or your local GE service department when your data fails to meet any
specifications.

1–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE

Input Selection
Verify that an input selection on the Power Distribution Unit (See Illustrations 1–4 or 1–5) meets the input power volt-
age. If not, correct them.
The ‘input power voltage’ here means the rating voltage specified on the power distribution box (hospital supply), not
the measured voltage on the power distribution box.

Illustration 1–4 Voltage Selection (For 380~480V System)

ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
SELECT
PROPER ÉÉ
INPUT
VOLTAGE.

ÂÂ
PROTECTION COVER
TRANSFORMER

ÂÂ
ÂÂ

1–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE (Continued)

Illustration 1–5 Voltage Selection (For 208/200V System)

ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ SELECT
ÉÉ PROPER
INPUT
VOLTAGE.

TRANSFORMER

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
PROTECTION COVER ÂÂ

1–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE (continued)


The following assumes that the power source for the system was checked for mean voltage, as well as any line voltage
disturbance during preinstallation site checks.

Instrument
Use the same instrument (Dranetz, etc.) to monitor line voltage during this check that you used during the preinstalla-
tion check. The recommended line analyzer is the Dranetz Model 606–3 (3 channel) with the 101 frequency option, or
Dranetz Model line monitor plug in modules. You can use a similar analyzer, as long as it can monitor and report mean
voltage, surges, sags, short term impulses, and frequency drift.

Check Using an Instrument


Monitor the input power lines (200 VAC (for JAPAN Only), 380 VAC, 400 VAC, 415 VAC, 440 VAC, 460 VAC, or 480
VAC) to the PDU at the Power Distribution Box (on terminals L1, L2, and L3) (hospital supply). Check in particular:

D Verify that the current line voltage equals the voltage measured during the preinstallation check.

D Verify that mean line voltage does not fall outside of equipment specifications during the day to day opera-
tion of other site equipment during the installation period.

D Look for any line voltage disturbances and check for a correlation between disturbances and system mal-
functions such as “Aborts” or component failures.

From the printouts, ensure that the power supply meets the following criteria:

D Line Voltage : 200 VAC(for JAPAN Only), 380 VAC, 400 VAC, 415 VAC, 440 VAC, 460 VAC or
480 VAC
(50 Hz/60 Hz) (Normal Steady State)

D Daily Voltage Variation : +10% to –5% from nominal steady state (50 Hz)
+6% to –5% from nominal steady state (60 Hz)

D Frequency : 50 Hz ± 2 Hz, 60 Hz ± 2 Hz.

Check Using an Oscilloscope


Monitor the power lines with an oscilloscope and verify that no significant distortion, noise or transients exist. Switch
between the oscilloscope’s long and short time base to monitor for spikes, as well as line drift over time. Generally,
harmonics of the third, seventh, and eleventh derivative will be the most prevalent.

Action
Investigate any condition that falls out of spec. Identify the problem source(s) and resolve the problem.

1–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION


Before attempting this power application and functional check, make sure that the breakers and switches match the
instructions given in ‘Checks prior to Applying Power Ground Continuity.’

WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THE UNIT, USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID INJURY
TO PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT.

Follow this procedure exactly in the order it was written. This procedure was developed with your safety in mind.
Follow this sequence to protect you and the equipment from irreparable damage.

1. Preparation:

a. Remove the front cover from the PDU (to access the breakers).

b. Remove the rear cover from the OC (to access the breakers).

c. Remove the front, rear, and left side covers from the Gantry (to access the Servo amp).

d. Verify again that all breakers and switches (OC rear panel, Gantry rear base, and PDU) are OFF according to
‘Checks prior to Applying Power Ground Continuity.’

e. Verify that wiring and cabling are correctly connected.

2. Switch ON the breaker on the power distribution box (hospital supply).

3. Switch ON the CB2 breaker on the PDU.

4. Verify that the power–ON lamp of the PDU is ON.

1–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION (Continued)


5. Measure 24.5 ∼ 25.5 VDC between output terminals of the DC power supply. See Illustration 1–6.

6. Measure the followings:

D Slip Ring line:


95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 of TM5 in the PDU when CB2/CB5 are ON and
CB1/CB3/CB4/CB6 are OFF.

D AUX line:
95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 11 and 12 of TM2 when CB2/CB6 are ON and CB1/CB3/CB4/CB5 are
OFF.

7. Push the OC power switch once. The K2, K3, and K4 will be turned ON. (This does NOT turn ON the OC since the
CB6 is OFF.)

8. Measure the followings:

D OC line:
95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 7 and 8 of TM2 when CB2/CB6 are ON and CB1/CB3/CB4/CB5 are OFF.

D TG115V line:
95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 3 and 4 of TM2 when CB2/CB4 are ON and CB1/CB3/CB5/CB6 are OFF.

D TG200V line:
165 ∼ 235 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 of TM2 when CB2/CB3 are ON and CB1/CB4/CB5/CB6 are
OFF.

D Jedi line:
340 ∼ 530 VAC between terminals 1, 3, and 5 of K1 when CB1 are ON and CB2/CB3/CB4/CB5/CB6 are
OFF.

9. Turn ON all breakers in the PDU.

1–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION (Continued)

Illustration 1–6 Measurement on PDU

RMT CNT Assy


Power Supply

CB1

CB5
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
CB6

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
K20

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
CB2

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
K8 K9

K19

CB3
CB4

K3
K2
K5 K6 K7 K1

10. Push the OC power switch once. This does not turn ON the OC.

11. Verify that the voltage between terminals on TM 1 of the OC is 95 ∼ 135 VAC. See Illustration 1–3.

12. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

Verify that the x–ray generator on the rotating assembly is powered ON; this can be verified by checking that
LEDs on the XG controller boards turn ON. Also verify that the x–ray tube fan and pump start to operate.

13. Switch on the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

14. Measure 180 ∼ 220 VAC on the Servo Amplifier input (between N and L terminals).

15. Turn ON the breakers of the OC.

16. Install the OC, PDU, and Gantry covers.

1–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-6 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK

WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD! BECAUSE OF THE CONTINUOUS ROTATION OF THE GANTRY THERE
ARE HAZARDS INVOLVED IN WORKING ON OR NEAR THE GANTRY. THE MOST OBVIOUS
HAZARD IS THE AXIAL MOTION OF THE GANTRY. THE HIGH VOLTAGE (HV) SUBSYSTEM
IS MOUNTED DIRECTLY ONTO THE GANTRY. THE HV SUBSYSTEM CONSISTS OF
COMPONENTS THAT ARE BULKY AND HEAVY. GIVE ROTATION HAZARDS RESPECT.

1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove all covers from the Gantry.

3. Set the safety brackets (three) on the Gantry frame.

4. Switch ON the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch.

5. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board on the Gantry.

6. Rotate the Gantry manually to verify that nothing interferes the Gantry during rotation (cables, etc.).

7. Set the Service switch to OFF.

8. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.

Verify that you hear the rotation alarm sound.

9. Switch OFF the ‘Power’ switch on the OC.

10. Switch ON the ‘Power’ switch on the OC.

Verify that the Gantry starts to rotate, and it stops at the home position (x–ray tube at 12 o’clock position) before
making two revolutions.

1–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-7 EMERGENCY OFF TEST


After this test, press the reset button on the OC to resume the system.

1. Power ON the system.

2. Remove the left side maintenance cover from the Gantry.

3. Move the cradle IN from its home position.

4. Press one of the emergency stop switches on the Gantry.

5. Verify that power is removed from the Gantry and Table. Verify the following:

a. LEDs on the TGP board are extinguished.

b. Gantry display panels (right and left) are extinguished.

6. Depress one of the tilt buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables tilt.

7. Depress one of the table elevation buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables table elevation.

8. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables the cradle drive.

9. Move the cradle to the home position by hand, to verify the emergency stop released the cradle clutch.

10. Make sure the cradle latches securely in the home position.

11. Using a pencil, press the emergency stop reset switch on the OC (see Illustration 1–7). Make sure the tilt, eleva-
tion, and cradle drive now work.

1–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-7 EMERGENCY OFF TEST (Continued)

Illustration 1–7 Location of Emergency Stop Reset Switch

EMERGENCY STOP RESET SWITCH

12. Repeat steps 1. through 11. using the other Gantry emergency stop switch (one).

13. Repeat steps 1. through 11. using the OC emergency stop switch (one).

14. OC Emergency OFF test:

a. Perform the scan using the following parameters:

0.8 sec/120 kV/10 mm thickness/160 mA (NP+Twin/NP+/NP)


0.7 sec/120 kV/10 mm thickness/160 mA (NP++/NP++Twin)

b. During scanning, press the OC Emergency stop switch.

c. Verify that:

D Immediately X–ray exposure stops.

D The Gantry stops to rotate within two revolutions.

15. Repeat steps 1. through 11. using the PDU emergency stop switch (one).

16. Remove all the covers from the Gantry, then repeat steps 1. through 11. using the Gantry emergency stop
switches on its frame (four).

1–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-8 FILTER
There are two filters on the OC.

D OC: Horizontal, two on the bottom of console

Perform the following cleaning procedure.

1. Slide the filter at the bottom of the OC forward until it is removed from the OC.
(The OC front cover does not need to be removed)

2. Suck up any dust on the filters with a vacuum cleaner.

3. Slide or fit each filter back into its enclosure.

1–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-9 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY


Check the overheat detection function by performing the following:

1. Verify that Anode Rotation of the Tube is OFF. If not, perform Rotor OFF scan from Offline Scan screen of OC
to stop the Rotor.

2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “Slip Ring 115V” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.

3. Remove the front and the left maintenance covers of the Gantry.

4. Disconnect the rotor connector:

If the connector is not accessible, perform the following:

a. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.

b. Rotate the Gantry manually to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 o’clock position).

c. Set the Service switch to OFF.

5. Switch ON the “Slip Ring 115V” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.

6. Try to perform Offline scan; select “Stationary”, and Azimuth “C”.

7. Verify that a scan can not be performed and that the “XG ERROR” message is reported on the CRT status
screen.

8. Switch OFF the “Slip Ring 115V” and “XG Power” switches.

9. Reconnect the connector.

1–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-9 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY (continued)

Illustration 1–8 Rotor Cable Connector at X–ray Tube

For System with D3142T Tube

Rotor Connector (Brown)

For System with D3152T Tube

Rotor Connector

1–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-10 SCAN TEST


This ‘Scan Test’ procedure assumes that all the subsystems (Operator Console, Gantry, Table, DAS/Detector, and
X–ray generator) are functioning normally.

In this procedure refer to the Operator manual for detailed information.

Warm Up Scan
1. Make sure that nothing is in the scan area in the Gantry room.

2. Click on the ‘Daily Prep’ icon to start the x–ray tube warm–up program.

3. Press the blinking [Start Scan] button on the OC keyboard to start the warm–up scan.
It will take approx. 3 minutes to complete scans.

Make sure that all warm up scans complete without error.

4. Click on [OK] button to return to the initial screen.

Scoutview Scan
5. Perform a series of scout scans to check scout scan operations:

a. Tilt the Gantry to any angle (other than 0°).

b. Try to perform a scout scan. (Any scan parameters can be set.)

Make sure that the software prohibits a scout scan with the Gantry tilted.

c. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.

d. Lay the 25 cm water phantom horizontally on the cradle.


Perform an AP (0°) scout scan on the phantom.

Verify that the phantom diameter (In–Out direction) on the image is 266 mm ±3 mm.

e. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.


Perform an LT (90°) scout scan on the phantom.

f. Use the [External landmark] button on the Gantry control panel to perform the phantom positioning so that
positioning light and center of the phantom are aligned.

g. Select [Suspension] for Autovoice.

h. Press the [External landmark] button and verify that:

D The cradle can NOT be moved.

D The cradle position is the same value as the external landmark.

i. Click on Confirm, then verify that the [Move to Scan] button blinks.

1–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-10 SCAN TEST (continued)


j. Press the [Move to Scan] button, then press the [Stop Move] button before the cradle reaches the set position.
Verify that the cradle stops to move and the [Move to Scan] button blinks again.

k. Press the [Move to Scan] button and move the cradle to the set position. Verify that the [Start Scan] button
blinks.

l. Perform the scan and verify that the scan can complete with no error.

Axial Scan Sequence


6. Perform a series of axial scans to check axial scan operations:

a. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.

b. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.

c. Use the [Internal landmark] button on the Gantry control panel to perform the phantom positioning so that
positioning light and center of the phantom are aligned.

d. Select [Inspiration] for Autovoice.

e. Use the following scan parameters: (Other parameters can be set to any value.)

Thickness : 10 mm
kV : 120 kV
mA : 150 mA
Interval : 10 mm
Scan time : 3 sec
Position : Feet First

f. Click on Confirm, then verify that the [Start Scan] button blinks.

g. Press the [Start Scan] button and verify that:

D You can hear and understand auto voice for scan start.

D The scan starts.

D Both X–ray ON indicators on the OC keyboard and Gantry panel is lit and X–ray ON alarm starts to sound.

h. Press the [Pause] button during scanning and verify that:

D The scan stops at next ISD and the [Confirm] button is changed to the [Resume] button.

D You can hear and understand auto voice for scan end.

i. Click on Resume, then verify that the [Start Scan] button blinks again.

j. Press the [Start Scan] again to continue scanning.

1–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 32 2202123

1-10 SCAN TEST (continued)


k. Press the [Stop Scan] button and verify that:

D The scan stops IMMEDIATELY and the [Confirm] button is changed to the [Resume] button.

D Both X–ray ON indicators on the OC keyboard and Gantry panel is OFF and X–ray ON alarm stops to
sound.

D You can hear and understand auto voice for scan end.

l. Click on End Exam and verify that the rotation of the Gantry and rotor in the X–ray tube stops to rotate.

Axial Scan
7. Perform a series of axial scans to check axial scan operations:

a. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.

b. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.

c. Use the following scan parameters: (Other parameters can be set to any value.)

Acquisition No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Scan Time [sec] NP/NP+/ 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
NP+Twin
NP++/ 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
NP++Twin

Thickness : 10 mm
kV : 120 kV
mA : 150 mA
Interval : 10 mm
Position : Feet First
No. of Images : 2

d. Verify that each scan completes with no error.

1–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

1–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

SECTION 2 – SOFTWARE LOADING


FOR V/R 5.5 OR LATER (INCLUDING V/R 6 AND V/R 7)

Compatible with Version 5.5x or later System Software, including


V/R 6.xx and V/R 7.xx
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Use this instructions when:
D Performing the System Version–up (LFC) or Revision–up (LFW)
D Replacing the HDD with a new one (LFC)

2-1 GENERAL

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS THE UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER
BEFORE YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.

This ‘Software Loading’ describes the Load–From–Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading (OS +
application) procedure (Load–From–Cold : LFC) and Load–From–Warm (LFW) procedure only for NP application
loading from CD–ROMs and some MODs to the system hard disk.

Shaded paragraph shown in this section means that this might happens depending on a system.

CAUTION
Make sure that all Images have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD before perform-
ing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re–initialize all system
data disk, erasing all images and scan data.

2–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-1 General (Continued)


An LFC/LFW procedures are outlined in Illustration 2–1.

NOTICE
If system version is returned to old version, the LFC procedure MUST be used. (Do NOT use
the LFW procedure.)

NOTICE
When the V/R 4.x is installed:
Depending on the system, the CD–ROM jumper setting might be changed. Refer to the OC
Jumper setting, CD–ROM of this manual.

Illustration 2–1 Software Loading Standard Procedure

Procedures Prerequisite
LFC LFW

1 Saving Patient Data Two blank MODs


2 Saving System State Data None A blank MOD
3 Saving Option Information –
4 Shutdown the System None –
5 Installing System Software (OS) None Two CD–ROMs: Core
* Loading Installation Tool OS
* Disk Partitioning and OS Installa-
tion
6 Installing Application Software CD–ROM(s): Applica-
tion Software
7 System Configuration – Phase 1 (preconfig)
Restoring the System Configuration Data MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
8 System Configuration – Phase 2 (auxconfig)
Initiating Configuration –
Restoring the System State Data MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
Restoring the Option Key –
Ejecting Application CD–ROM and MOD –
9 Editing the File (For the System with V/R 5.50 ONLY) –
(Continued)

2–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-1 General (Continued)

Procedures Prerequisite
LFC LFW
10 Installing the Revision–up (Patch) software
Loading Revision–up (Patch) software CD–ROM : (Patch)
Software
Patch Verification –
11 Restoring the System State Data AGAIN! MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
12 Changing System Configuration (Reconfig) –
13 Option Check –
14 Starting Up the System NOW! –
15 Completing the LFC / LFW Procedures
Restoring Patient Data MODs in which the
images or raw data
have been saved
Setting Gamma Value –
Test Scan –
16 Installing the InSite Software None CD–ROM : InSite
(Service) Software

2–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-2 PREPARATION

Prepare the followings before starting the LFC/LFW Procedure.

D CD–ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2) (for LFC Only)

D CD–ROM : Application Software

D CD–ROM : Patch Software (if required)

D CD–ROM : Service Software (InSite software, if required)

D Option MOD (if new options are installed)

D 2 MODs (Must be prepared by FE)

– For Saving System State Data (one MOD’s A side)

– For Saving Patient Images (another MOD’s A side)

– For Saving Raw Data (another MOD’s B side)

Note
5 inches 2.3 GB MOD is required.

NOTICE
Always use a 5 inch 2.3GB MOD media. A 1.2GB or 600MB MOD can NOT be used when sav-
ing data.

Note
For the MODs to save system state data or patient images, they do NOT need to be manually for-
matted. (A used–MOD is available.) This means that the format procedures will be automatically
started before saving data.

2–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA

CAUTION
Make sure that all Images and raw data have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD
before performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). Both LFC and LFW proce-
dures will re–initialize all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.

Prerequisite
D Two blank MOD

Note
Patient Image data and Raw data MUST be saved on the different MODs.

Procedures
1. If required, save the Patient image on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Selection (e.g.
select all examination) –> Archive –> (Label) –> Save examination)
After saving image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.

2. If required, save the raw data on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. The MOD must be initialized first when
using a new MOD. (Scan –> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata Function –> Function Selection –> Save to
MOD –> Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Save)

2–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section (because it will be saved in Section 2-8-2, Software Installation
(For LFW procedure)) and go to Section 2-5, Saving Option Information.

Prerequisite
D One blank MOD

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

Procedures
Before beginning the software install, save the system state data.

1. Verify that the system is powered ON.

2. Set the write protect tab of the MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.

3. Select Service –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate.

4. Click on Confirm.

5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

Note
The following will be saved as a system state data.
– Option key information
– Log files (log for success/failure when saving/restoring software sets)
– Scan protocol files
– IOS preferences
– Calibration files
– Autovoice files
– Next patient exam number
– User preferences
– InSite information
– Tube usage information
– Crosstalk A, B channel data
– TnT Definition File log
– Q cal channel ratio

7. Press the eject button of the MOD drive to eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

2–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION

The option information are normally saved in the system state data. However, they must be written down in the follow-
ing table as a back–up. This table can be used when option data reloading fails.

1. On the desktop menu, click on List Option button located on the upper right of the screen.
Option list will appear.

2. Write down the current “Installed option”.

Option Installed? Option Installed? Option Installed?

3D Dicom MOD Raw Data 1000 Max


Smart Prep Power 200mA Max Remote Tilt
Smart Recon Power 250mA Max Enhanced Cooling
SmartView Power 300mA Max Extended FOV
DentaScan Power 350mA Max Performix Tube
Navigator Power 440mA Max Performix 530 Cooling
CTPerfusion Fast Scan 0.7 sec Thickness 1mm
Helical Plus Fast Scan 0.8 sec Thickness 0.5mm
Connect Pro Fast Scan 1.0 sec Asymmetric Scan
ImageDisk Helical 30 Max Cardiac Gating
ImageDisk 20000 Helical 60 Max Scan Limit 2.0 sec
Pioneer MOD Helical 120 Max Smart Addition
Respiratory Gating
Note: Depending on the system version, unavailable option might be included in the option list above.

3. Click on Quit to return to the desktop menu.

2–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-5 Saving Option Information (Continued)


4. For Asymmetric Option Only:
When a system contains Asymmetric Scan Option, the asymmetric mode must be recorded. This is used at
Section 2-10-3, Restoring the Option key.

a. Click on Reconfig –> Preferences.

b. Click on Configuration of the Asymmetric scan.

c. Write down the asymmetric mode (10:1, 10:2, or 6:1), then click Quit –> Quit to return to the desktop menu.

2–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-5 Saving Option Information (Continued)


5. For ConnectPro Option Only:
When a system contains ConnectPro Option, the setting parameters must be recorded. This is used at Section
2-10-3, Restoring the Option key.

a. Click on shell.

b. Enter the following commands to display the ConnectPro information, then write down them to the table be-
low.

cat /usr/g/config/WLSystem.cfg
AE_Title HIS Server AE Title
IP_Address HIS Server IP Address
Port_Number HIS Server AE Port #
cat /usr/g/config/WLdcm.cfg
bi_apptitle CT Server AE Title
cat /usr/g/ctuser/app–defaults/network/ppsServer.map
AppTitle PPS Server AE Title
IPAddress PPS Server IP Address
IPPortNo PPS Server AE Port #

c. Enter Exit to return to the desktop menu.

2–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 2-8-2, Installing Application Software, Soft-
ware Loading (LFW procedure).

1. Click on Shutdown on the desktop menu.

Some test programs run. The NO button to be displayed is clicked.

2. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.

3. Click on Restart.

4. Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

Stop for maintenance button


can be clicked instead of press-
ing the ESC key.

5. Press ESC key.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When replacing the HDD with a new one ONLY:
The HDD labeling procedure MUST be performed at this time!!!
Refer to Section 2-19, Troubleshooting Tips, HDD labeling procedures.

2–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS)

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 2-8-2, Installing Application Software, Soft-
ware Loading (LFW procedure).

Prerequisite
D CD–ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 50 minutes

Procedures

2-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool)


1. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. Verify that the LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.

3. Click on Install System Software.

4. Click on Local CD–ROM icon.

5. Click on Install.

Note
The following CD–ROM error might appear, but ignore it.
“dksc1d1vol alert illegal request illegal field in CDB (asc=0x24, asq=0x0) CDB:1aoooc0”

6. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation tools to disk” message appears. (miniroot loading phase) A few minutes later, the screen
will become in black, then “Inst Main Menu” appears.

Note
When some errors occur at this time, refer to Section 2-19-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.

2–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) (Continued)


Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 7 to 8 might be
skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

7. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Press Enter to invoke C Shell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)

# mkfs –t xfs /dev/rdsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>

******************************* Displayed *******************************


meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************

# exit <Enter>

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

8. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Make new file system on /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 [yes/ne/sh/help]: yes <Enter>


Are you sure? [y/n] (n): y <Enter>
Do you want an EFS or XFS file system? [efs/xfs]: xfs <Enter>
Block size of file system 512 or 4096 bytes? 4096 <Enter>

2–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation


1. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Inst> admin <Enter>

Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)

# mount /CDROM <Enter>

# /CDROM/bin/makepart <Enter>

2. Verify that the following message are displayed.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Creating disk partitions automatically.
.......
************************************************************************

3. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.
Click on Restart.

Note
Instead of clicking on Restart, pressing ESC key twice goes to step5.

When “/CDROM/bin/makepart [258] xxxxx (coredump)” message appears:

Even if this appears, the partitioning is correctly executed, but a problem lies in executing the shut-
down process.
Therefore, if this happens, switch OFF the OC, wait for a few seconds, then switch ON the OC.
If a error except above occurs, refer to Section 2-19-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.

The window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button appears (shown be-
low).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

Stop for maintenance button


can be clicked instead of press-
ing the ESC key.

4. Press ESC key.

5. Click on Install System Software.

6. Click on Local CD–ROM icon.

2–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


7. Verify that:

D The CD–ROM (Core OS (1 of 2)) remains into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

D The LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.

8. Click on Install.

9. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation Tools to disk” message appears.

Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 10 to 12 might be
skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

10. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Enter your selection and Press ENTER (c, f, r, or a) r <Enter>


(Procedure for reloading miniroot tool is started. It takes approx. 1 minutes.)

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

11. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Press Enter to invoke C Shell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)

# mkfs –t xfs /dev/rdsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>

******************************* Displayed *******************************


meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************

# exit <Enter>

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

12. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Make new file system on /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 [yes/ne/sh/help]: yes <Enter>


Are you sure? [y/n] (n): y <Enter>
Do you want an EFS or XFS file system? [efs/xfs]: xfs <Enter>
Block size of file system 512 or 4096 bytes? 4096 <Enter>

2–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


13. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Inst> admin <Enter>

Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)

# mount /CDROM <Enter>

# /CDROM/bin/cptool <Enter>

# /makedisk <Enter>
(Procedure for system file configuration is started. It takes approx. 15 minutes.)

Note:
The error messages might be displayed when a command “/CDROM/bin/makedisk” is
entered. If this happens, enter a command “/CDROM/bin/makedisk” again to proceed.

14. Verify that the following message will appear.


************* Displayed **************************************************
Installations and removals were successful.
Enter HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Core OS (2 of 2) CD–ROM...
************************************************************************
15. Press the eject button of the CD–ROM drive to eject the CD–ROM, Core OS (1 of 2), from the CD–ROM drive.
16. Insert the CD–ROM, Core OS (2 of 2), into the CD–ROM drive.
Installation procedure starts. It takes approx. 7 minutes to complete it.
17. After completion of installing Core OS (2 of 2), verify that the following message will appear.
************* Displayed *************************************************
Installations and removals were successful.
........
Exit from the shell using ‘exit’.
************************************************************************
18. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

# exit <Enter>

Admin> exit <Enter>

Inst> exit <Enter>

Automatically reconfiguring the operating system.


Ready to restart the system. Restart? xxxxx y <Enter>
(The screen will become in black.)

NOTICE
Do not remove the OS CD–ROM at this time. It MUST be removed in Section 2-8, Installing
Application Software.

2–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


19. Approx. 30 seconds later, “IRIS’s Internet address....” message appears (shown below).

IRIS’s Internet address is the default.


Using standalone network mode.

Note
In the next message, you might see the error message, “ALERT: SCSI hard error on (1,3). scb
0x807aeac0”. This will continues to be displayed for the system with DASM only until the configura-
tion setting is completed. However, this message can be ignored.

The system will automatically login as root.

2–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Note
For installing the application revision–up (Patch) software, refer to Section 2-12.

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Software

D For LFW ONLY:


One blank MOD (for saving the system state data)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

Procedures

2-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure)


1. Double–click on instsw icon.

a. Select the system Product Name.

b. Click Yes.
(Pressing No returns to the Select Product window.)

“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears and the OS CD–ROM will be ejected from the
CD–ROM drive.

2. Insert the CD–ROM (application software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 7 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.

NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 2-10-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM.

2–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure)


1. On the desktop menu, click on LFW located on the upper right of the screen.

2. Click on Yes in response to “Do you really want to do LFW?”

3. Set the write protect tab of the blank MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the
OC.

4. Click on Confirm.
The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

7. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.

8. Select the system Product Name.

9. Click Yes.
(Pressing No returns to the Select Product window.)

“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears.

10. Insert the CD–ROM (application software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 7 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.

NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 2-10-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM.

2–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) (Continued)


Note
Depending on the system, the following steps 11 might be skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

11. Select “Copy the environment from the selected machine” then click on OK if the following window
appears:

<Desktop Environment setup>


You have logged in to the following system(s) in the past, on which your
home directory is mounted.

“IRIS”

Choose how you want your environment to be setup.


– Create a new environment.
– Copy the environment from the selected machine.
– Share (link) the environment with the selected machine.

To skip this window at login, check below:


– Always create, copy, or share as chosen above.

2–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG)

NOTICE
Do not check or change system configuration at this time
(preconfig phase). It is performed at section 2-14, Chang-
ing System Configuration (Reconfig).
Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 2-4)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

2-9-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data


1. Double–click on Preconfig icon located at the upper right of the screen.
2. “Insert mod and press confirm!” message appears.
Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 2-4, into the MOD drive.
3. Click on Confirm.
4. Click on Continue icon a few times. The system setting screen appears.
5. Click on Accept. (Nothing changes.)
The system is rebooted. It takes approx. 7 minutes.

2–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2–AUXCONFIG)

Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 2-4)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 7 minutes

2-10-1 Initiating Configuration


1. Double–click on auxconfig icon.

2. The Date entry screen appears.

D When modifying date, click on Set, then Quit.

D When not–modifying date to proceed, click on Quit.

The system configuration procedures are started, then automatically login as root.

2-10-2 Restoring System State Data

Procedures
1. “Restore System State data (Click on No if no saved data exists)?” appears. Click on Yes.

2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Verify that the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
2-4, is inserted into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.

3. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

4. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.
It takes approx. 3 minutes.

5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.


Go to section 2-10-3, Restoring Option Key.

2–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-10-3 Restoring Option Key

Prerequisite
D None

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 3 minutes

Procedures

Do NOT touch any soft buttons ex-


The option installation procedures automatically starts.
cept for entry described in Note!
After completing automatic installation for option, the system shuts down, then starts up automatically. Then go to
Section 2-10-4, Ejecting the CD–ROM.

Note
When the system contains the following options, the proper entry must be required.

D Denta Option:
1. Power ON a camera connected to the CT system.
2. “The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera ...” message appears. Enter y
3. “Please select a printer in the list....” message appears. Select a proper printer.
4. Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film.
5. “Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous step.

Note
Entry must be performed in unit of mm. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch value to mm
value using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm”

D ConnectPro Option:
1. ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters written down in 2-5, Saving Option Informa-
tion, then click on Accept.
2. PPS Server Setup window appears. Any values might be entered as a default. Enter the parameters
written down in 2-5, Saving Option Information, then click on Accept. (When the hospital does Not has a
PPS server, perform no modification and click on Accept.)

D Raw Data 1000 Max Option:


“All scan data has been removed” message appears. Click on OK .

D Asymmetric Scan Option:


Select the asymmetric mode (recorded in Section 2-5, Saving Option Information), then click on Accept .

2–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-10-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD


1. “Auto–Start Disabled” window appears. Click on OK.

2. In desktop menu, select Shell and type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

3. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT click on Startup at this time!

2–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-11 EDITING THE FILE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 5.50 ONLY)

The following patch procedures must be performed for the system with V/R 5.50 ONLY. For the system with 5.51
or later, skip this section, then go to Section 2-12, Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software.

1. Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.

2. Move the mouse in the shell window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% su
<Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> cd /usr/g/config <Enter>
> nedit rawmgr.init <Enter>

3. Select Search –> Find.

4. The Find window appears. Move the cursor into the Find window, then enter #STARTTIMEOUT , then click
on Find to display “#STARTTIMEOUT=” in the window.

NOTICE
If the cursor is left in the script window, the script
will be rewritten so that the system can not be
started up.
5. Delete “#” and add “60” to be modified to STARTTIMEOUT=60 .

Modified

6. Select File –> Save.

7. Select File –> Exit.

8. Enter exit twice to terminate the shell window.

NOTICE
Do NOT click on Startup at this time!

2–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-12 INSTALLING REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE

If the system has a revision–up (patch) software, it must be installed at this time.
If it does not, skip this section, then go to section 2-14, Changing System Configuration (reconfig).

2-12-1 Loading revision–up software


This is the common procedures for system revision–up.

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Revision–up (Patch) Software

Procedures
1. Insert the CD–ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software located on the upper right of the screen.

3. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” window appears. Click on Yes.

4. “Following software will be installed” window appears. Click on Yes.


The patch installation procedures are automatically started.

5. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful.” window.

Note
Some patch softwares might require reboot (shown below). If it does, when clicking on OK, the sys-
tem automatically reboots and pauses at the desktop menu.

Software Package Installation

Software Package Installation

6. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell on the upper right of the screen.

2–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-12-1 Loading revision–up software (Continued)


7. Type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

NOTICE
Do NOT click on Startup at this time!

2-12-2 Patch Verification


1. Click on List S/W Package.
2. Click on Patch.
3. Verify that information for the patch installed are displayed. (Example)
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Patch NPP5x00x: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 5.xx
Patch NPP5x00y: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 5.xy
************************************************************************

4. Click on Close.

NOTICE
Do NOT click on Startup at this time!

2–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-13 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN!

When performing the LFC/LFW, manually restore the system state data AGAIN at this time.
Do NOT start up the system yet!

Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 2-4)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 2 minutes

Procedures
1. In desktop menu, select Restorestate.

2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
2-4, into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.

3. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

4. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.

5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

6. Eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT click on Startup at this time!

2–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Reconfig)

The System configuration data MUST be checked or changed when a different version of the application software
has been loaded, because new setting(s) might be added in a new version of software.

2-14-1 Configuration Setup

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 15 minutes

1. In desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration screen appears.

2. Enter the appropriate configuration data.

NOTICE
The following items restrict the use of characters for entry. Do NOT use other characters.

Items Characters Usable for Entry


Hospital Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), period (.), comma (,), and space
Machine # numerics (0–9)
Station Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), and period (.)

2–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


3. System Setting Screen:

a. Changes Hospital Name to the site’s preferred name.

b. Select the Timezone for this site, and record it below.

Time Zone

c. Verify Model Name.

Note
The Model Name is currently not implemented.

d. Verify Machine # .
The unique machine # is printed on the label attached near the OC rating plate.

e. Verify/change Station Name. (Entry MUST be performed using up to 4 characters.)

f. Select Preferences to proceed to the next screen.

2–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


4. Preferences Setting Screen:

a. Select Time Format to be displayed on screen.

b. Select Units for patient weight for units for patient weight to be displayed on images.

c. For HiSpeed Series ONLY:


Select Bone Kernel. (default: Type 1)

Note
“Type 2” is less artifact, but lower resolution than Type 1.

d. Select Date Format to be displayed on images.

Note
To use Japanese era for date, YY/MM/DD format must be selected.

2–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


e. Select Auto mA. Select Target SD1 for higher mA, Target SD2 for middle mA, or Target SD3 for lower mA
according to the following mA table.
GE recommends “Target SD1” for Japan and “Target SD2” for countries other than Japan, but this
selection depends on a customer’s preferences. If a customer requires a different image quality, select an
other Target SD.

Auto mA modes

IQ High mA (High IQ)


SD1
Normal
IQ
SD2 Low Dose
Normal
IQ
SD3
Low Dose
Normal
Low Dose
Low mA (Low IQ)

Target SD IQ Level
For V/R 3.x system For V/R 4.x or later system
SD IQ SD1 IQ 1.63
SD Normal SD1 Normal 1.47
– SD2 IQ 1.40
SD Low Dose SD1 Low Dose 1.33
– SD2 Normal 1.26
– SD3 IQ 1.22
– SD2 Low Dose 1.14
– SD3 Normal 1.10
– SD3 Low Dose 1.0
Note: V/R 3.x SD and V/R 4.x or later SD1 are equal in IQ level.

2–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


f. For the system with Asymmetric Scan option ONLY:
Click on Configuration, then select Asymmetric mode and click on Accept.

Mode Meanings
10:1 Provides 10 mm and 1 mm slices.
10:2 Provides 10 mm and 2 mm slices.
6:1 Provides 6 mm and 1 mm slices.

g. Select Language to proceed to the next screen.

2–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


5. Language Setting Screen:

a. Select the Language for this site.

b. Select Default Autovoice Language for this site.

c. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.

2–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


6. Hardware Setting Screen:

a. Select a proper Gantry Setting, depending on the system.

b. Select a proper Filter Type, depending on the system.

D Solarix (NP) for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M

D Solarix (NP) SmartFilter should be selected for the system with SmartFilter Option
When the SmartFilter Option label has been attached at the OC rear cover, select this filter type.
Note: This option is standard for HiSpeed NX/i, LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M from ’99 FW44 production.

D Performix SmartFilter for HiSpeed ZX/i Series, NX/i Pro

c. Select a proper Keyboard, depending on the system.

d. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).

e. Select a proper Serial Expander.

f. Click on 50 KVA, for the system with 50 kVA option. (CT HiSpeed series ONLY)

2–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


g. Click on Diagnosis Settings.
Type the following responses to the indicated messages:

Supported product types


a. NP
b. NPTWIN
Enter product type (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select “b.NPTWIN” for HiSpeed NX/i series

NRE Global memory sizes


a. 16Mb
b. 32Mb
c. 64Mb
Enter GM option (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select “c. 64Mb” for HiSpeed NX/i series

Enter # of Slave DSP? 16 <Enter>


Enter a twice numbers of the NPRS boards inside the OC. See table below.

Number of NPRS Entry


1 2
2 4
4 8
8 16

ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
HiSpeed Series

ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ

NPRS
NPRM

Nest

Is this info correct (y=yes, n=no)? y <Enter>

Note
If you enter a wrong memory size, select [n] to start over the entry.

h. Select Camera to proceed to the next screen.

2–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


7. Camera Setting Screen:

a. Select either Laser Camera or DICOM Printer.

When Laser Camera is Selected:

2–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


b. Set the following parameters:

D Laser Camera Type : Choose the closest option.

D DASM Interface : This option must match your physical DASM type; for DASM–LCAM, select Digital.
For DASM–VDB, select Analog.

D Do NOT select Slides or Zoom. Use Film Composer –> Options –> Slide formats when selecting this
parameter, because the Film composer option overrides the System configuration option.

D Smooth/Sharp selects sharper or smoother image interpolation.

c. Click on Accept. Then go to Network Setting Screen.

2–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)

When DICOM Printer is selected:

IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the V/R 5.5 or later system, DICOM Print setting MUST be performed in this system config-
uration screen.

Note
For a summery of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print, refer to Appendix, 2-19-2
DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips.

D Add: used when adding the DICOM printer newly to the system.

D Delete: used when deleting the DICOM printer selected from the Device File list.

D Update: used when modifying the setting for the DICOM printer selected from the Device File list.

a. Click on Add.

2–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


The DICOM Print Camera setting screen appears.

DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen (1st page):

b. Set the following parameters, then click on Advanced. This goes to 2nd setting screen (for setting advanced
parameters) for DICOM Print Camera (step c).

2–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


D Camera Type:
Select a proper manufacturer for DICOM printer.
After you select the appropriate Camera Type, the system automatically pre–set default values into the
DICOM Print Camera settings screen area.

Pre–set Default Value (Reference Value)


Fuji Konica Kodak Agfa
Imation (dry) Wet
Medium Type Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Film Orientation Portrait Portrait Portrait Portrait Portrait
Destination Processor Processor Magazine Magazine Processor
Magnification Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic
Type
Film Format – – – – –
Configuration 1 KC_LUT=2 LUT=Ver693c0. CS300\\CN1 PRECEP-
W87,8 TION_LUT=140
Maximum Den- 300 300 300 300 300
sity
Minimum Den- 22 22 22 22 22
sity
Smoothing Off Off Off Off Off
Type
Empty Density Black Black Black Black Black
Border Density Black Black Black Black Black
Film Size 14IN x 17IN Empty Empty Empty Empty
Trim Off Off Off Off Off

D Network Parameters :
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Name, same as Host Name (Name shown in the header title
of the Film composer).
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Host Name.
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device IP Address.
Enter the AE title from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming Device.
Enter the TCP Listen Port from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming
Device.

2–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)

NOTICE
When, at the DICOM Print Camera side, you enter the AE title of a CT system connected to
the printer, CT Host Name _DCP must be used.

Note:
Filmer DICOM AE (Application Entity) Title may be site specific. Make sure that you check with the
Filming Device Service Representative and the hospital network administrator to ensure you are us-
ing the correct AE Title for the destination Filming Device.

D Medium Type:
Select the appropriate Medium Type parameter. Check with the radiology department and the
Filming Device Service Representative to determine whether the department is using BLUE
FILM, CLEAR FILM, or PAPER.

D Film Orientation:
Select PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE. If you change this parameter, you might also change the Film For-
mat. Consult the manufacturer of a DICOM printer for proper Film Format settings.

D Destination:
Select the appropriate Destination parameter. Check with the radiology department and the Filming De-
vice Service Representative to determine whether to use MAGAZINE or PROCESSOR.

D Magnification Type:
Select the appropriate Magnification Type parameter. This parameter selects the algorithm used to inter-
polate pixels to provide desired film resolution. Check with the Filming Device Service Representative to
ensure the best Image Quality film presentation. For most Filming Device manufacturers, the preferred
selection is CUBIC.

Magnification Type Selection Descriptions:


–NONE: No interpolation. This selection is available for camera types that do not support Magnification
Type algorithms.
– REPLICATE: Adjacent pixels are interpolated which results in images described as “pixelly”. This algo-
rithm is not usually preferred.
–BILINEAR: A first order interpolation of pixels is used which results in images described as blurred. This
algorithm is not usually preferred.
–CUBIC: A third order interpolation is used with a large number of possible formulations. Filming Device
manufacturers define parameters called smoothing type to set coefficients used in the algorithm. The im-
plementation of these coefficients is Filming Device manufacturer dependent.

D Film Format:
Use the default values. However, if you change Film Orientation, you might also change the Film Format.
Consult the manufacturer of a DICOM printer for proper Film Format settings.

2–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)

DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen: (2nd page – Advanced Parameters)

2–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


c. Use the Advanced Parameters window to set the Image Quality Parameters. To ensure these settings are
correct, verify all selections with the Filming Device Service Representative.
Set the following parameters, then click on Back to return to the 1st page.

D Configuration: (See the graph below.)


This parameter is automatically set just when selecting the DICOM printer manufacturer on the 1st page.
If you change this parameter, consult both customer and printer manufacturer.
This parameter is typically used to specify the image contrast (select a LUT curve).

The Configuration field may be up to 1024 characters long. The filed will scroll automatically as characters
are typed. To review the Configuration field if the entire length does not appear in the parameter window,
click and hold down the middle mouse button while the cursor is in the window.

D Minimum and Maximum Density: (See the graph below.)


These parameters are automatically set just when selecting the DICOM printer manufacturer on the 1st
page. If you change these parameters, consult both customer and printer manufacturer.
These parameters are used to set the brightness for the images on the film. The range of values is 0 –
4095.

Relationship among Configuration, Maximum Density, and Minimum Density

Maximum Density

Minimum Density

Configuration (LUT Curve)

D Smoothing Type:
This parameter is used when the Magnification Type is set to CUBIC. The parameter represents the coeffi-
cient for the image resolution algorithm and is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and must be veri-
fied with the radiology department after filming review.

2–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


D Empty Density: (See Illustration below.)
This parameter sets the density for empty film view ports. Typically, BLACK is used but WHITE is an op-
tion. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.

D Border Density: (See Illustration below.)


This parameter sets the density for the border used around the film viewports. Typically, BLACK is used
but WHITE is an option. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.

Empty Density Border Density

D Film Size and Trim:


Use the default values. Do NOT change parameters.

d. On the 1st setting screen, click on Accept.

e. On the Camera Setting screen, select Quit. Then go to Network Setting Screen.

2–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)

When Auto Film Setting is selected:


Until now, a customer must change the camera type for filming per series using AutoFilm Setup. For V/R 5.5 or later
system, it can be changed at a time by a FE using this button . Refer to Appendix 2-19-3, AutoFilm Setting Function
for more information.

a. Select Remote Printer to print out an image.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
Once you have clicked on Accept, all of the remote printers that a customer has set individu-
ally will be changed to the printer selected at AutoFilm Setting. This can NOT be reset to the
previous printers.

a. Click on Accept.

b. On the Camera Setting screen, select Quit. Then go to Network Setting Screen.

2–45 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


8. Network Settings screen:

GATEWAY

IP ADDRESS

IP ADDRESS

HOST NAME

CT

2–46 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


a. Click on Network on.
The check box becomes red.

b. OC Parameters Setting:

i. Enter Host Name.


Host Name identifies the name of this CT. This name must be unique for the site, and will appear in unix
prompts and in a few other places. If you set up a network connection to the site, the OC computer will
appear on the site’s network as <Host Name>.

ii. Enter IP Address.


The IP address is administrated by a network administrator. Ask a network administrator to assign an IP
address.

iii. Enter Net Mask.(if required.)


The Net Mask is to divide the IP address between the network bits and the host bits. The Net Mask is
determined by a network administrator.

c. If this system is not connected to a “Site Subnet” then;

D Verify all other fields are set to the defaults:

OC – Net Mask Gateway – Host Name Gateway – IP Address


255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254

d. If this system is connected to a “Site Subnet” then continue as follows;


Gateway Parameters Setting:

i. Enter the Gateway Parameter (IP Address). If possible consult the site’s network administrator before
configuring the interface to the site’s network. The site administrator should provide the Gateway IP Ad-
dress.

2-14-2 Completing Configuration


1. Click on Accept after completing the configuration.
The system is rebooted and returns to the desktop menu.

2. “Auto–Start Disabled” message appears. Click on OK.

2–47 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-15 OPTION CHECK

1. In desktop menu, select List Options.


The option(s) currently installed is displayed.

2. Using the option list recorded at section 2-5, Saving Option Information, verify that the proper option(s) has been
correctly reloaded to the system.

3. Click on Quit.

2–48 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-16 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW!

1. In desktop menu, select Shutdown to restart the system.

NOTICE
When performing Application–Shutdown and then restarting the system, always use the
Shutdown button. Do not use the Startup Button, because this might not work correctly.

2. Verify that the system starts up with no error.

3. Confirm that the latest version of software has been installed in the system. The system version is displayed
at the lower right of the screen while the system is starting up.

4. Click on OK in Attention window.

2–49 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-17 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE

2-17-1 Restoring Patient Data


1. Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Archive –> Restore
–> Selection –> All examination –> Restore –> Restore examination –> OK)
After restoring image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.

2. Restore the raw data to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Scan –> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata
Function –> Function Selection –> Restore/Delete from MOD –> (Select all rawdata using shift key.) –>
Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Restore)

2-17-2 Setting Gamma Value


The gamma value for CRT/LCD display must be set after system software installation.

1. Click on Service icon located on the upper left screen.

2. Click on Shell.

3. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% su<Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> gamma 1 <Enter> (To modify gamma value to 1.0.)
(Note: One space input is required between inputs of “gamma”
and “1”.)
> gamma <Enter> (To verify that gamma value should be 1.000000.)

> exit <Enter> (To terminate the shell window.)

> exit <Enter> (To close Unix shell.)

2-17-3 Test Scan


1. Perform scans to verify that they are completed with no errors.

The LFC has now been completed!

2–50 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-18 INSITE INSTALLATION

For the system with the InSite ONLY, install the InSite AGAIN after LFC.
When performing LFW, InSite installation is NOT required since it is NOT deleted.

2-18-1 General

Prerequisite
D The modem must be powered up.

D Prepare the followings before starting the InSite Installation Procedure.


CD–ROM : V/R6.00 InSite Software (Must be prepared by FE, distributed through TAB 287.)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 30 minutes

Note
Boot–up sequence may fail and the system will lock–up just after the scan key lights in case of,
D Class M software was installed but Install InSite was not executed.
D Install InSite was quitted without clicking APPLY button in Device Connection tab if Modem is
selected as device connection type.

To avoid this lock–up,


Execute Install InSite after the installation of Class M software and complete all settings in each tab
by clicking APPLY button.

If the lock–up occurs, cycle power, stop application start up, and execute:
‘/usr/g/insite/bin/installmodem –os off’, by becoming root.

2-18-2 Installing InSite Software


1. To display the desktop menu:
Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown –> OK.

2. Insert the InSite CD–ROM into the CD–ROM drive.

3. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software button located on the upper right of the screen.

4. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” message appears.


Click on Yes.

5. “Following software will be installed” window appears.


Click on Yes.
The InSite software loading procedures is started. It takes a few minutes to complete.

2–51 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-18-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)


6. “Installation complete.” message appears.
Click on OK.

7. On the desktop menu, click on Shell button located on the upper right of the screen.

8. Type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

9. On the desktop menu, click on Install InSite button located on the upper right of the screen.
One minute later, the InSite Interactive Platform Configuration screen appears.

10. Click on ACCEPT three times.


Illustration 2–2 InSite Interactive Platform Configuration Screen

2–52 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-18-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)

NOTICE
After entering InSite Setup Screen, call the local support center to set up the InSite together.

GEMS – Americas GEMS – Europe GEMS – Asia


CT National Support Center European Support Center Asia Support Center
Phone: 1–800–321–7937 (33) 1 3083 1300 81–426–56–0033
FAX: (262)896–2710 (33) 1 3070 9970 81–426–56–0053

11. After a moment, the InSite Setup Screen appears.


Click on InSite Checkout tag.

Illustration 2–3 InSite Setup Screen

2–53 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-18-3 Setting up InSite Checkout

NOTICE
VERY IMPORTANT: You MUST run the checkout in order to establish the InSite connection.
Checkout MUST be rerun in the event of a system re–load.

1. The InSite Checkout Screen appears.


Click on CHECKOUT NOW.

Illustration 2–4 InSite Checkout Screen

DISABLE INSITE

2–54 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-18-3 Setting up InSite Checkout (Continued)


2. The “Configure InSite Now” window appears.

3. Click on OK.

Illustration 2–5 Configure InSite Now Window

4. To perform an InSite checkout, call your local technical support center.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
The OLC Checkout procedure depends on whether or not a customer’s system has iLinq li-
cense. For a iLinq–licensed system, verify that iLinq icon is seen next to the Service Icon
after the checkout has been successfully completed.

5. When the checkout process has been completed successfully, you might get some messages such as “InSite
Dial out Check completed Successfully” from a local support center.

2–55 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-18-4 Completing the insite installation


1. Click on Exit to complete the InSite installation.

Illustration 2–6 Closing the InSite Setup

DISABLE INSITE

InSite has now been installed!


2-18-5 Saving InSite Information
The configuration files for Class–M software and InSite features are saved to MOD as part of the Save System State
process.

1. Set the write protect tab of the MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.

2. On the desktop menu, click on Savestate.

3. Click on Confirm.

4. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

5. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

6. Press the eject button of the MOD drive to eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

7. In desktop menu, select Shutdown to restart the system.

NOTICE
When performing Application–Shutdown and then restarting the system, always use the
Shutdown button. Do not use the Startup Button, because this might not work correctly.

8. Verify that the system starts up with no error.

2–56 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-19 APPENDIX

2-19-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips


According to the following flow chart, perform OS installation troubleshooting. When an error can not be recovered,
contact your local technical support center.

Message displayed during Miniroot Loading

A trouble occurs dur- Enter ‘c’ to continue booting the old miniroot with no state fixup.
ing OS installation. Enter ‘f’ to fix miniroot install state, and try again.
Enter ‘r’ to reload the miniroot.
Enter ‘a’ to abort (cancel) the installation.
Enter your selection and press ENTER (c, f, r, or a)

Does the mes-


sage above ap- Yes
pears during
miniroot load- Enter “ r ”.
Was the trouble
recovered?
Yes

ing?

No
No

Power OFF the OC main


switch, then ON Again.
Perform the HDD labeling Refer to the procedure
procedures. described in the follow-
ing page.

Was the trouble Yes


recovered?

No

Refer to the procedure


Format the HDD. It described in the follow-
takes approx. 3 hours!! ing page.

NOTICE: Since the HDD might be


physically damaged even if a trouble
was recovered, you should replace
the HDD as soon as possible.
Was the trouble Yes
recovered?

No

Replace the HDD. Return to the LFC procedures.

2–57 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

HDD Labeling Procedures

NOTICE
When an error occur during OS loading procedures and the system can not recover from it.,
perform the following steps a to d (This procedure performs both label and repartition of the
HDD to load the install program on the HDD.)

a. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

b. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

c. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version x.x ARCS xxxx, xxxx


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> l/c/a <ENTER> (l: Label, c: Create, a: All)
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>

label info has changed for disk dksc (0,1,0). write out changes?(yes)
<ENTER>

d. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)

2–58 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

How to format a System HDD


Note
It takes approximately 3 hours!!

NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!

1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.


Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

3. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

4. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

5. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

6. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> d <ENTER>

2–59 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

How to format a System HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> fo <ENTER>

fx/debug/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current)


<ENTER>
.........
..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>

Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 3 hours to format a 9GB HDD.

7. Verify that “format completed successfully” message appears.

8. Type the following to start the repartition procedures:

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> .. <ENTER>

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> ro <ENTER>

fx/repartition/rootdrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>


Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

2–60 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

How to format a System HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>

9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot. (Proceed to Section 2-7-1, Loading Miniroot (Installation
tool).)

2–61 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

How to format an Image HDD


Note
It takes approximately 3 hours!!

NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!

1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.


Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

3. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

4. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

5. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

6. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) 2 <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> d <ENTER>

2–62 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

How to format an Image HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> fo <ENTER>

fx/debug/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current)


<ENTER>
.........
..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>

Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 3 hours to format a 9GB HDD.

7. Verify that “format completed successfully” message appears.

8. Type the following to start the repartition procedures:

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> .. <ENTER>

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> o <ENTER>

fx/repartition/optiondrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>


Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

2–63 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

How to format an Image HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>

9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot to perform LFC. (Proceed to Section 2-7-1, Loading Mini-
root (Installation tool).)

2–64 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips


The following is a summary of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print that was gathered during software testing
and validation of the DICOM Print feature.

ERROR BRINGING UP THE CAMERA INSTALLATION/FILMING APPLICATION


D Symptom: After creating/modifying the DICOM Print Camera the install camera interface does not come
up and the filming application indicates it cannot bring up the film composer.
Cause: The configuration field contains invalid information such as a backslash (\) as the final character
in the field or brackets ({}).

D Solution: The camera.dev file in “~ctuser/app–defaults/devices” must be manually edited to remove the
offending characters in the set configuration line. Invalid characters include \{}

CONFIGURATION INFORMATION FIELD


D Symptom: Cannot view the entire configuration field (> 25 characters)

D Solution: Hold down the middle mouse button and move the field contents

NEED TO SET DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES NOT SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE


D Symptom: User wants the white border around each image box ON/OFF permanently for this system
and it cannot be set as the default for the camera.

D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/app–
defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
For Trim Off – set TRIM NO
For Trim On – set TRIM YES

D Symptom: DICOM Print Camera supports multiple film sizes and the User only wants to print if the Film
Size is correct for [14x17]. [Otherwise the camera will queue the films or return an error causing the queue
to pause (based upon the DICOM Print Camera specifications).]

D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/app–
defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
To force a 14x17 film size – set filmSize 14INX17IN

a. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown –>
OK.

b. Click on Shell.

2–65 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (Continued)


c. Type as follows:

> cd /usr/g/ctuser/app–defaults/devices <Enter>


> ls *.dev <Enter>
camera.dev (This is the file for a laser imager.)
di3.dev (Example; This is the file for DICOM printer.)
xxx.dev (Example; another DICOM printer)
> nedit di3.dev <Enter> (Example; the current DICOM printer is “di3.dev”.)

d. Add the following line to the dev file for the current DICOM printer.

#first the obligatory fields

set dName ”di3”


set dPort 104
set dComment ””
set dType digital
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType DICM
set dQueueName dicom
set dAppTitle ”di3”
set dIPAddress X.XX.XXX.XXX
set dHostName di3
set filmSize 14INX17IN (Add this line here!)

#then the optional fields

e. Select File –> Save.

f. Type exit <Enter> to terminate the shell window.

NEED TO PREVENT DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES FROM BEING SENT TO DICOM PRINT CAMERA
D Symptom: Some DICOM Print attributes are optional, and may result in fatal errors. For example, the
Fuji camera does not support the Empty Image Density parameter for the film box.

D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line(s) to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/
app–defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
– To prevent sending the Smoothing Parameter set FB_Smooth FALSE
– To prevent sending the Border Density set FB_Border FALSE
– To prevent sending the Empty Image Density set FB_EID FALSE
– To prevent sending the Minimum Density set FB_MinD FALSE
– To prevent sending the Trim Parameter set FB_Trim FALSE

2–66 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (Continued)

ERROR TRYING TO CONNECT TO THE DICOM PRINT CAMERA


D Symptom: DICOM Print server can be reached (ping), but Application error indicates “Unable to start film-
ing interface” and the help message talks about running the install.dasm (Association Error)

D Solution: The system is unable to complete the association. Check the AE Title and the Port number of
the DICOM Print Server and correct them using reconfiguration, CT Camera setting screen.

FILM COMPOSER ERROR NOT USABLE


D Symptom: Film Composer error says ”unrecognized status – code 0”

D Solution: Review the log file, the attention and status windows. These areas have the correct filming sta-
tus (e.g. film jam, supply empty)

DEBUGGING CONNECTION ISSUES DIFFICULT


D Symptom: The timeouts for the DICOM Print are very long, which means one needs to wait a long time
before you know the application is not working.

D Solution: The timeouts for the DICOM Print were setup to ensure that the system would work regardless
of whether the DICOM Print Camera was on a LAN or a WAN halfway around the world. The DICOM Print
timeouts for the association and DIMSE classes (e.g. N–GET, N–DELETE) can be modified within the
DICOM Print camera installation. They can be reduced down to 90 seconds.

DICOM PRINT ERROR ON N–GET TIMEOUT CONFUSING


D Symptom: When the N–GET timeout goes off, the error message in the prslog file will be “Could not get
printer status, invalid command sequence for N–GET”.

D Solution: When the User sees the above error they may want to consider that the issue may be an inactiv-
ity timer on the N–GET DIMSE Service.

DICOM PRINT CAMERA SLIDE SUPPORT


D Symptom: Current implementation of DICOM Print does not allow selection of slide format.

D Solution: Feature not currently supported. Possibly in future releases.

CONFUSION ON FILM FORMAT NOTATION


D Symptom: GEMS Laser Camera and DICOM Print film format notations are opposite.

D Solution: GEMS Laser Camera film format notation has always been
– row x col (e.g. 12 on 1 = 4x3)
– DICOM Print Standard film format notation is
– col x row (e.g. 12 on 1 = 3x4)

2–67 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 35 2202123

2-19-3 AutoFilm Setting Function


This function is made available in V/R 5.5 or later, and used for changing at a time the camera type of all protocols
which already have been set.

This can change the parameters of Destination and Format in Autofilm Setup screen. The other settings in Autofilm
Setup screen and all settings of Film Tab Card in View/Edit Screen are NOT changed.

Autofilm Setup
Destination
Laser Camera

Format Size Auto Start Auto Print


Normal Slide Yes Yes

Copies Exam Page Series Page


1
Yes Yes

Scout XRef–Scout
Film Direction
Top to Bottom

Auto Film Composer Show Grayscale

e/s/i Yes

Changed

OK Cancel

NOT Changed
Film Tab Card
Scan Timing Recon Film

Auto Frame Width Level Mag User GSE


Interval Flip Rotate
Film Format 1 1 Factor Anno.

Recon 1 Recon 1 Recon 2 Recon 2 Recon 3 Recon 3


Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set
NOT Changed 1 2 1 2 1 2

2–68 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

SECTION 3 – SOFTWARE LOADING


FOR V/R 5.0X

Compatible with Version 5.0x System Software


IMPORTANT NOTE:
Use this instructions when:
D Performing the System Version–up (LFC) or Revision–up (LFW)
D Replacing the HDD with a new one (LFC)

3-1 GENERAL

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS THE UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER
BEFORE YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.

This ‘Software Loading’ describes the Load–From–Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading (OS +
application) procedure (Load–From–Cold : LFC) and Load–From–Warm (LFW) procedure only for NP application
loading from CD–ROMs and some MODs to the system hard disk.

Shaded paragraph shown in this section means that this might happens depending on a system.

CAUTION
Make sure that all Images have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD before perform-
ing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re–initialize all system
data disk, erasing all images and scan data.

3–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-1 General (Continued)


An LFC/LFW procedures are outlined in Illustration 3–1.

NOTICE
If system version is returned to old version, the LFC procedure MUST be used. (Do NOT use
the LFW procedure.)

NOTICE
When the V/R 4.x is installed:
Depending on the system, the CD–ROM jumper setting might be changed. Refer to the OC
Jumper setting, CD–ROM of this manual.

Illustration 3–1 Software Loading Standard Procedure

Procedures Prerequisite
LFC LFW

1 Saving Patient Data Two blank MODs


2 Saving System State Data None A blank MOD
3 Saving Option Information –
4 Shutdown the System None –
5 Installing System Software (OS) None Two CD–ROMs: Core
* Loading Installation Tool OS
* Disk Partitioning and OS Installa-
tion
6 Installing Application Software CD–ROM(s): Applica-
tion Software
7 System Configuration – Phase 1 (preconfig)
Restoring the System Configuration Data MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
8 System Configuration – Phase 2 (auxconfig)
Initiating Configuration –
Restoring the System State Data MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
Restoring the Option Key –
Ejecting Application CD–ROM and MOD –
(Continued)

3–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-1 General (Continued)

Procedures Prerequisite
LFC LFW
9 Installing the Revision–up (Patch) software
Loading Revision–up (Patch) software CD–ROM : (Patch)
Software
Patch Verification –
10 Restoring the System State Data AGAIN! MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
11 Changing System Configuration (Reconfig) –
12 Option Check –
13 Starting Up the System NOW! –
14 Starting DICOM Print Camera –
15 Completing the LFC / LFW Procedures
Restoring Patient Data MODs in which the
images or raw data
have been saved
Setting CRT Gamma Value –
Test Scan –
16 Installing the InSite Software None CD–ROM : Service
Software

3–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-2 PREPARATION

Prepare the followings before starting the LFC/LFW Procedure.

D CD–ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2) (for LFC Only)

D CD–ROM : Application Software

D CD–ROM : Patch Software (if required)

D CD–ROM : 2269719 V/R5.00 Service Software (if required)

D Option MOD (if new options are installed)

D 2 MODs (Must be prepared by FE)

– For Saving System State Data (one MOD’s A side)

– For Saving Patient Images (another MOD’s A side)

– For Saving Raw Data (another MOD’s B side)

Note
5 inches 2.3 GB MOD is required.

NOTICE
Always use a 5 inch 2.3GB MOD media. A 1.2GB or 600MB MOD can NOT be used when sav-
ing data.

Note
For the MODs to save system state data or patient images, they do NOT need to be manually for-
matted. (A used–MOD is available.) This means that the format procedures will be automatically
started before saving data.

3–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA

CAUTION
Make sure that all Images and raw data have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD
before performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). Both LFC and LFW proce-
dures will re–initialize all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.

Prerequisite
D Two blank MOD

Note
Patient Image data and Raw data MUST be saved on the different MODs.

Procedures
1. If required, save the Patient image on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Selection (e.g.
select all examination) –> Archive –> (Label) –> Save examination)
After saving image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.

2. If required, save the raw data on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. The MOD must be initialized first when
using a new MOD. (Scan –> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata Function –> Function Selection –> Save to
MOD –> Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Save)

3–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section (because it will be saved in Section 3-8-2, Software Installation
(For LFW procedure)) and go to Section 3-5, Saving option information.

Prerequisite
D One blank MOD

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

Procedures
Before beginning the software install, save the system state data.

1. Verify that the system is powered ON.

2. Set the write protect tab of the MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.

3. Select Service –> System Tools –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate.

4. Click on Confirm.

5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

Note
The following will be saved as a system state data.
– Option key information
– Log files (log for success/failure when saving/restoring software sets)
– Scan protocol files
– IOS preferences
– Calibration files
– Autovoice files
– Next patient exam number
– User preferences
– InSite information
– Tube usage information
– Crosstalk A, B channel data
– TnT Definition File log
– Q cal channel ratio

7. Press the eject button of the MOD drive to eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

3–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION

The option information are normally saved in the system state data. However, they must be written down in the follow-
ing table as a back–up. This table can be used when option data reloading fails.

1. On the desktop menu, click on List Option button located on the upper right of the screen.
Option list will appear.

2. Write down the current “Installed option”.

Option Installed? Option Installed? Option Installed?

3D Dicom MOD Helical 30 Max


Smart Prep Power 200mA Max Helical 60 Max
Smart Recon Power 250mA Max Helical 120 Max
SmartView Power 300mA Max Raw Data 1000 Max
DentaScan Power 350mA Max Remote Tilt
Navigator Power 440mA Max Enhanced Cooling
Helical Plus Fast Scan 0.7 sec Extended FOV
Connect Pro Fast Scan 0.8 sec Performix Tube
Image Disk Fast Scan 1.0 sec Thickness 1mm
Pioneer MOD Thickness 0.5mm
Note: Depending on the system, unavailable option might be included in the option list above.

3. Click on Quit to return to the desktop menu.

4. For ConnectPro Option Only:


When a system contains ConnectPro Option, the setting parameters must be recorded. This is used at Section
3-10-3, Restoring the Option key.

a. Click on shell.

b. Enter the following comannds to display the ConnectPro information, then write down them to the table belw.

cat /usr/g/config/WLSystem.cfg
AE_Title HIS Server AE Title
IP_Address HIS Server IP Address
Port_Number HIS Server AE Port #
cat /usr/g/config/WLdcm.cfg
bi_apptitle CT Server AE Title

c. Enter Exit to return to the desktop menu.

3–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 3-8-2, Installing Application Software, Soft-
ware Loading (LFW procedure).

1. Click on Shutdown on the desktop menu.

Some test programs run. The NO button to be displayed is clicked.

2. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.

3. Click on Restart.

4. Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

Stop for maintenance button


can be clicked instead of press-
ing the ESC key.

5. Press ESC key.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When replacing the HDD with a new one ONLY:
The HDD labeling procedure MUST be performed at this time!!!
Refer to Section 3-19, Troubleshooting Tips, HDD labeling procedures.

3–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS)

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 3-8-2, Installing Application Software, Soft-
ware Loading (LFW procedure).

Prerequisite
D CD–ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 50 minutes

Procedures

3-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool)


1. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. Verify that the LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.

3. Click on Install System Software.

4. Click on Local CD–ROM icon.

5. Click on Install.

Note
The following CD–ROM error might appear, but ignore it.
“dksc1d1vol alert illegal request illegal field in CDB (asc=0x24, asq=0x0) CDB:1aoooc0”

6. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation tools to disk” message appears. (miniroot loading phase) A few minutes later, the screen
will become in black, then “Inst Main Menu” appears.

Note
When some errors occur at this time, refer to Section 3-19-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.

3–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) (Continued)


Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 7 to 8 might be
skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

7. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Press Enter to invoke C Shell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)

# mkfs –t xfs /dev/rdsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>

******************************* Displayed *******************************


meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************

# exit <Enter>

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

8. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Make new file system on /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 [yes/ne/sh/help]: yes <Enter>


Are you sure? [y/n] (n): y <Enter>
Do you want an EFS or XFS file system? [efs/xfs]: xfs <Enter>
Block size of file system 512 or 4096 bytes? 4096 <Enter>

3–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation


1. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Inst> admin <Enter>

Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)

# mount /CDROM <Enter>

# /CDROM/bin/makepart <Enter>

2. Verify that the following message are displayed.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Creating disk partitions automatically.
.......
************************************************************************

3. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.
Click on Restart.

Note
Instead of clicking on Restart, pressing ESC key twice goes to step5.

When “/CDROM/bin/makepart [258] xxxxx (coredump)” message appears:

Even if this appears, the partitioning is correctly executed, but a problem lies in executing the shut-
down process.
Therefore, if this happens, switch OFF the OC, wait for a few seconds, then switch ON the OC.
If a error except above occurs, refer to Section 3-19-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.

The window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button appears (shown be-
low).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

Stop for maintenance button


can be clicked instead of press-
ing the ESC key.

4. Press ESC key.

5. Click on Install System Software.

6. Click on Local CD–ROM icon.

3–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


7. Verify that:

D The CD–ROM (Core OS (1 of 2)) remains into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

D The LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.

8. Click on Install.

9. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation Tools to disk” message appears.

Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 10 to 12 might be
skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

10. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Enter your selection and Press ENTER (c, f, r, or a) r <Enter>


(Procedure for reloading miniroot tool is started. It takes approx. 1 minutes.)

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

11. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Press Enter to invoke C Shell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)

# mkfs –t xfs /dev/rdsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>

******************************* Displayed *******************************


meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************

# exit <Enter>

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

12. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Make new file system on /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 [yes/ne/sh/help]: yes <Enter>


Are you sure? [y/n] (n): y <Enter>
Do you want an EFS or XFS file system? [efs/xfs]: xfs <Enter>
Block size of file system 512 or 4096 bytes? 4096 <Enter>

3–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


13. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Inst> admin <Enter>

Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)

# mount /CDROM <Enter>

# /CDROM/bin/cptool <Enter>

# /makedisk <Enter>
(Procedure for system file configuration is started. It takes approx. 15 minutes.)

Note:
The error messages might be displayed when a command “/CDROM/bin/makedisk” is
entered. If this happens, enter a command “/CDROM/bin/makedisk” again to proceed.

14. Verify that the following message will appear.


************* Displayed **************************************************
Installations and removals were successful.
Enter HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Core OS (2 of 2) CD–ROM...
************************************************************************
15. Press the eject button of the CD–ROM drive to eject the CD–ROM, Core OS (1 of 2), from the CD–ROM drive.
16. Insert the CD–ROM, Core OS (2 of 2), into the CD–ROM drive.
Installation procedure starts. It takes approx. 7 minutes to complete it.
17. After completion of installing Core OS (2 of 2), verify that the following message will appear.
************* Displayed *************************************************
Installations and removals were successful.
........
Exit from the shell using ‘exit’.
************************************************************************
18. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

# exit <Enter>

Admin> exit <Enter>

Inst> exit <Enter>

Automatically reconfiguring the operating system.


Ready to restart the system. Restart? xxxxx y <Enter>
(The screen will become in black.)

NOTICE
Do not remove the OS CD–ROM at this time. It MUST be removed in Section 3-8, Installing
Application Software.

3–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


19. Approx. 30 seconds later, “IRIS’s Internet address....” message appears (shown below).

IRIS’s Internet address is the default.


Using standalone network mode.

Note
In the next message, you might see the error message, “ALERT: SCSI hard error on (1,3). scb
0x807aeac0”. This will continues to be displayed for the system with DASM only until the configura-
tion setting is completed. However, this message can be ignored.

The system will automatically login as root.

3–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Note
For installing the application revision–up (Patch) software, refer to Section 3-11.

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Software

D For LFW ONLY:


One blank MOD (for saving the system state data)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

Procedures

3-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure)


1. Double–click on instsw icon.

a. Select the system Product Name.

b. Click Yes.
(Pressing No returns to the Select Product window.)

“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears and the OS CD–ROM will be ejected from the
CD–ROM drive.

2. Insert the CD–ROM (application software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 7 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.

NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 3-10-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM.

3–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure)


1. On the desktop menu, click on LFW located on the upper right of the screen.

2. Click on Yes in response to “Do you really want to do LFW?”

3. Set the write protect tab of the blank MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the
OC.

4. Click on Confirm.
The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

7. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.

8. Select the system Product Name.

9. Click Yes.
(Pressing No returns to the Select Product window.)

“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears.

10. Insert the CD–ROM (application software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 7 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.

NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 3-10-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM.

3–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) (Continued)


Note
Depending on the system, the following steps 11 might be skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

11. Select “Copy the environment from the selected machine” then click on OK if the following window
appears:

<Desktop Environment setup>


You have logged in to the following system(s) in the past, on which your
home directory is mounted.

“IRIS”

Choose how you want your environment to be setup.


– Create a new environment.
– Copy the environment from the selected machine.
– Share (link) the environment with the selected machine.

To skip this window at login, check below:


– Always create, copy, or share as chosen above.

3–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG)

NOTICE
Do not check or change system configuration at this time
(preconfig phase). It is performed at section 3-13, Chang-
ing System Configuration (Reconfig).
Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 3-4)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

3-9-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data


1. Double–click on Preconfig icon located at the upper right of the screen.
2. “Insert mod and press confirm!” message appears.
Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 3-4, into the MOD drive.
3. Click on Confirm.
4. Click on Continue icon a few times. The system setting screen appears.
5. Click on Accept. (Nothing changes.)
The system is rebooted. It takes approx. 7 minutes.

3–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2–AUXCONFIG)

Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 3-4)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 7 minutes

3-10-1 Initiating Configuration


1. Double–click on auxconfig icon.

2. The Date entry screen appears.

D When modifying date, click on Set, then Quit.

D When not–modifying date to proceed, click on Quit.

The system configuration procedures are started, then automatically login as root.

3-10-2 Restoring System State Data

Procedures
1. “Restore System State data (Click on No if no saved data exists)?” appears. Click on Yes.

2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Verify that the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
3-4, is inserted into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.

3. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

4. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.
It takes approx. 3 minutes.

5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.


Go to section 3-10-3, Restoring Option Key.

3–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-10-3 Restoring Option Key

Prerequisite
D None

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 3 minutes

Procedures

Do NOT touch any soft buttons ex-


The option installation procedures automatically starts.
cept for entry described in Note!
After completing automatic installation for option, the system shuts down, then starts up automatically. Then go to
Section 3-10-4, Ejecting the CD–ROM.

Note
When the system contains the following options, the proper entry must be required.

D Denta Option:
1. Power ON a camera connected to the CT system.
2. “The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera ...” message appears. Enter y
3. “Please select a printer in the list....” message appears. Select a proper printer.
4. Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film.
5. “Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous step.

Note
Entry must be performed in unit of mm. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch value to mm
value using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm”

D ConnectPro Option:
ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters written down in 3-5, Saving Option Information,
then click on Accept.

D Raw Data 1000 Max Option:


“All scan data has been removed” message appears. Click on OK .

3–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-10-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD


1. “Auto–Start Disabled” window appears. Click on OK.

2. In desktop menu, select Shell and type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

3. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

3–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-11 INSTALLING REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE

If the system has a revision–up (patch) software, it must be installed at this time.
If it does not, skip this section, then go to section 3-13, Changing System Configuration (reconfig).

3-11-1 Loading revision–up software


This is the common procedures for system revision–up.

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Revision–up (Patch) Software

Procedures
1. Insert the CD–ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software located on the upper right of the screen.

3. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” message appears. Click on Yes.

4. “Do you install selected Patch?” message appears. Click on Yes.


The patch installation procedures are automatically started.

5. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful. xxxxxxx”.

6. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.

7. Type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

3–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-11-2 Patch Verification


1. Click on List S/W Package.
2. Click on Patch.
3. Verify that information for the patch installed are displayed. (Example)
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Patch NPP5x00x: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 5.xx
Patch NPP5x00y: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 5.xy
************************************************************************

4. Click on Close.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

3–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-12 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN!

When performing the LFC/LFW, manually restore the system state data AGAIN at this time.
Do NOT start up the system yet!

Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 3-4)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 2 minutes

Procedures
1. In desktop menu, select Restorestate.

2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
3-4, into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.

3. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

4. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.

5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

6. Eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

3–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Reconfig)

The System configuration data MUST be checked or changed when a different version of the application software
has been loaded, because new setting(s) might be added in a new version of software.

3-13-1 Configuration Setup

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 15 minutes

1. In desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration screen appears.

2. Enter the appropriate configuration data.

NOTICE
The following items restrict the use of characters for entry. Do NOT use other characters.

Items Characters Usable for Entry


Hospital Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), period (.), comma (,), and space
Machine # numerics (0–9)
Station Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), and period (.)

3–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


3. System Setting Screen:

a. Changes Hospital Name to the site’s preferred name.

b. Select the Timezone for this site, and record it below.

Time Zone

c. Verify Model Name.

d. Verify Machine # .
The unique machine number must be entered according to the table in section 3-20-1, Entering the Machine
Number.

e. Verify/change Station Name. (Entry MUST be performed using up to 4 characters.)

Note
The Model Name is currently not implemented.

f. Select Preferences to proceed to the next screen.

3–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


4. Preferences Setting Screen:

a. Select Time Format to be displayed on screen.

b. Select Units for patient weight for units for patient weight to be displayed on images.

3–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


c. Select Auto mA. Select Target SD1 for higher mA, Target SD2 for middle mA, or Target SD3 for lower mA
according to the following mA table.
GE recommends “Target SD1” for Japan and “Target SD2” for countries other than Japan, but this
selection depends on a customer’s preferences. If a customer requires a different image quality, select an
other Target SD.

Auto mA modes

IQ High mA (High IQ)


SD1
Normal
IQ
SD2 Low Dose
Normal
IQ
SD3
Low Dose
Normal
Low Dose
Low mA (Low IQ)

Target SD IQ Level
For V/R 3.x system For V/R 4.x or later system
SD IQ SD1 IQ 1.63
SD Normal SD1 Normal 1.47
– SD2 IQ 1.40
SD Low Dose SD1 Low Dose 1.33
– SD2 Normal 1.26
– SD3 IQ 1.22
– SD2 Low Dose 1.14
– SD3 Normal 1.10
– SD3 Low Dose 1.0
Note: V/R 3.x SD and V/R 4.x or later SD1 are equal in IQ level.

d. Select Date Format to be displayed on images.

Note
To use Japanese era for date, YY/MM/DD format must be selected.

e. For HiSpeed Series ONLY:


Select Bone Kernel. (default: Type 1)

Note
“Type 2” is less artifact, but lower resolution than Type 1.

f. Select Language to proceed to the next screen.

3–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


5. Language Setting Screen:

a. Select the Language for this site.

b. Select Default Autovoice Language for this site.

c. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.

3–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


6. Hardware Setting Screen:

a. Select a proper Filter Type, depending on the system.

D Solarix (NP) for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M

D Solarix (NP) SmartFilter should be selected for the system with SmartFilter Option
When the SmartFilter Option label has been attached at the OC rear cover, select this filter type.
Note: This option is standard for HiSpeed NX/i, LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M from ’99 FW44 production.

D Performix SmartFilter for HiSpeed ZX/i Series, NX/i Pro

b. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).

c. Select a proper Keyboard, depending on the system.

3–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


d. Click on Diagnosis Settings.
Type the following responses to the indicated messages:

Supported product types


a. NP
b. NPTWIN
Enter product type (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select “b.NPTWIN” for HiSpeed NX/i series

NRE Global memory sizes


a. 16Mb
b. 32Mb
c. 64Mb
Enter GM option (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select “c. 64Mb” for HiSpeed NX/i series

Enter # of Slave DSP? 16 <Enter>


Enter a twice numbers of the NPRS boards inside the OC. See table below.

Number of NPRS Entry


1 2
2 4
4 8
8 16

ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
HiSpeed Series

ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ

NPRS
NPRM

Nest

Is this info correct (y=yes, n=no)? y <Enter>

Note
If you enter a wrong memory size, select [n] to start over the entry.

e. Select Camera to proceed to the next screen.

3–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


7. Camera Setting Screen:

a. When Laser Camera is selected:

Laser Camera Setting Screen:

Set the following parameters:

D Laser Camera Type : Choose the closest option.

D DASM Interface : This option must match your physical DASM type; for DASM–LCAM, select Digital.
For DASM–VDB, select Analog.

D Do NOT select Slides or Zoom. Use Film Composer –> Options –> Slide formats when selecting this
parameter, because the Film composer option overrides the System configuration option.

D Smooth/Sharp selects sharper or smoother image interpolation.

Click on Accept. Then go to Network Setting Screen.

3–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


b. When DICOM Print Camera is selected:
Click on Quit.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the V/R 5 system, DICOM Print setting MUST be performed in the film composer screen
due to software bug. (Refer to Section 3-16, Setting DICOM Print Camera.)

Select Network to proceed to the next screen.

3–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


8. Network Settings screen:

GATEWAY

IP ADDRESS

IP ADDRESS

HOST NAME

CT

3–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


a. Click on Network on.
The check box becomes red.

b. OC Parameters Setting:

i. Enter Host Name.


Host Name identifies the name of this CT. This name must be unique for the site, and will appear in unix
prompts and in a few other places. If you set up a network connection to the site, the OC computer will
appear on the site’s network as <Host Name>.

ii. Enter IP Address.


The IP address is administrated by a network administrator. Ask a network administrator to assign an IP
address.

iii. Enter Net Mask.(if required.)


The Net Mask is to divide the IP address between the network bits and the host bits. The Net Mask is
determined by a network administrator.

c. If this system is not connected to a “Site Subnet” then;

D Verify all other fields are set to the defaults:

OC – Net Mask Gateway – Host Name Gateway – IP Address


255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254

d. If this system is connected to a “Site Subnet” then continue as follows;


Gateway Parameters Setting:

i. Enter the Gateway Parameter (IP Address). If possible consult the site’s network administrator before
configuring the interface to the site’s network. The site administrator should provide the Gateway IP Ad-
dress.

3-13-2 Completing Configuration


1. Click on Accept after completing the configuration.
The system is rebooted and returns to the desktop menu.

2. “Auto–Start Disabled” message appears. Click on OK.

3–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-14 OPTION CHECK

1. In desktop menu, select List Options.


The option(s) currently installed is displayed.

2. Using the option list recorded at section 3-5, Saving Option Information, verify that the proper option(s) has been
correctly reloaded to the system.

3. Click on Quit.

3–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-15 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW!

1. In desktop menu, select Startup.


After the power–on test, the system will automatically start up.

2. Verify that the system starts up with no error.

3. Confirm that the latest version of software has been installed in the system. The system version is displayed
at the lower right of the screen while the system is starting up.

4. Click on OK in Attention window.

3–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-16 SETTING DICOM PRINT CAMERA

For the system with the DICOM print camera, configure the camera after start–up of the LFC last phase.
If it does not, go to Section 3-17, Completing the LFC procedure.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the V/R 5 system, DICOM Print setting MUST be performed in the film composer screen
due to software bug.

Note
For a summery of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print, refer to Appendix, 3-19-2
DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips.

1. Select Image works –> Film –> Configure –> Add –> Dicom.

2. Select a proper manufacturer for DICOM print camera, then click on Select.

Note
Select the appropriate DICOM Print Camera Types selection (Agfa, Imation Print Server,Kodak).
After you select the appropriate Camera Type, the system automatically pre–sets default values into
the DICOM Print Camera settings screen area of the next window. Verify with the Filming Device
Service Representative that these values match the model of the Filming Device.

The DICOM Print Camera setting screen appears.

3–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-16. Setting DICOM Print Camera (Continued)

DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen:

3. Set the following parameters, then click on Advanced. This goes to 2nd setting screen (for setting advanced
parameters) for DICOM Print Camera (step 4).

D Network Parameters :
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Name, same as Host Name.
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Host Name.
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device IP Address.
Enter the Application Title (AE title) from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with
the Filming Device.

3–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-16. Setting DICOM Print Camera (Continued)

NOTICE
When, at the DICOM Print Camera side, you enter the AE title of a CT system connected to
the printer, CT Host Name _DCP must be used.

Note:
Filmer DICOM Application Entity Titles may be site specific. Make sure that you check with the Film-
ing Device Service Representative and the hospital network administrator to ensure you are using
the correct AE Title for the destination Filming Device.

Enter the TCP Listen Port from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming
Device.

D Medium Type:
Select the appropriate Medium Type parameter. Check with the radiology department and the
Filming Device Service Representative to determine whether the department is using BLUE
FILM or CLEAR FILM.

D Destination:
Select the appropriate Destination parameter. Check with the radiology department and the Filming De-
vice Service Representative to determine whether to use MAGAZINE or PROCESSOR.

D Film Orientation:
Select PORTRAIT for the Orientation. Currently, this CT system only supports Portrait.

D Magnification Type:
Select the appropriate Magnification Type parameter. This parameter selects the algorithm used to inter-
polate pixels to provide desired film resolution. Check with the Filming Device Service Representative to
ensure the best Image Quality film presentation. For most Filming Device manufacturers, the preferred
selection is CUBIC.

Magnification Type Selection Descriptions:


–NONE: No interpolation. This selection is available for camera types that do not support Magnification
Type algorithms.
– REPLICATE: Adjacent pixels are interpolated which results in images described as “pixelly”. This algo-
rithm is not usually preferred.
–BILINEAR: A first order interpolation of pixels is used which results in images described as blurred. This
algorithm is not usually preferred.
–CUBIC: A third order interpolation is used with a large number of possible formulations. Filming Device
manufacturers define parameters called smoothing type to set coefficients used in the algorithm. The im-
plementation of these coefficients is Filming Device manufacturer dependent.

D Standard Film Format:


Use the default values. Do NOT change parameters.

3–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-16. Setting DICOM Print Camera (Continued)

DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen: (2nd Screen for Advanced Parameters)

4. Use the Advanced Parameters window to set the Image Quality Parameters. To ensure these settings are cor-
rect, verify all selections with the Filming Device Service Representative.
Set the following parameters, then click on Done to return to the 1st setting screen.

3–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-16. Setting DICOM Print Camera (Continued)


D Configuration:
This parameter is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and is typically used to specify the image con-
trast.
The Configuration field may be up to 1024 characters long. The filed will scroll automatically as characters
are typed. To review the Configuration field if the entire length does not appear in the parameter window,
click and hold down the middle mouse button while the cursor is in the window.

Recommended Configuration Setting Values:


Agfa DryStar (MG3000): PERCEPTION_LUT=KANAMORI (100)
Imation Dryview (8700): LUT=0,7
Kodak Laser Printer 190: CS434\CN0\PD1.20

D Minimum and Maximum Density:


These parameters are used to set the brightness for the images on the film. The range of values is 0 –
4095, although the valid range for a specific Filming Device is manufacturer dependent.

Recommended Minimum and Maximum Starting Values:


Agfa DryStar (MG3000): Min: 20 or 23 Max: 300
Imation Dryview (8700): Min: (Blank) Max: 300
Kodak Laser Printer 190: Min: 20 Max: 300

D Smoothing Type:
This parameter is used when the Magnification Type is set to CUBIC. The parameter represents the coeffi-
cient for the image resolution algorithm and is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and must be veri-
fied with the radiology department after filming review.

Recommended Smoothing Type Starting Values & Ranges:


Agfa DryStar (MG3000): Start Value: 140 Range: 137 – 150
Imation Dryview (8700): Start Value: 3 Range: 3 – 13
Kodak Laser Printer 190: Start Value: Enhanced Range: Normal

D Empty Density:
This parameter sets the density for empty film view ports. Typically, BLACK is used but WHITE is an op-
tion. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.

D Border Density:
This parameter sets the density for the border used around the film viewports. Typically, BLACK is used
but WHITE is an option. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.

D Film Size, Trim, and Priority:


Use the default values. Do NOT change parameters.

5. On the 1st setting screen, click on OK.

3–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-16. Setting DICOM Print Camera (Continued)


6. Click on Done to complete the DICOM Print Camera setting.

7. Click on Shutdown icon to reboot the system.

3–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-17 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE

3-17-1 Restoring Patient Data


1. Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Archive –> Restore
–> Selection –> All examination –> Restore –> Restore examination –> OK)
After restoring image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.

2. Restore the raw data to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Scan –> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata
Function –> Function Selection –> Restore/Delete from MOD –> (Select all rawdata using shift key.) –>
Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Restore)

3-17-2 Setting CRT Gamma Value


The gamma value for CRT display must be set after system software installation.

1. Click on Service icon located on the upper left screen.

2. Click on System Tools –> Unix Shell.

3. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% su<Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> gamma 1 <Enter> (To modify gamma value to 1.0.)
(Note: One space input is required between inputs of “gamma”
and “1”.)
> gamma <Enter> (To verify that gamma value should be 1.000000.)

> exit <Enter> (To terminate the shell window.)

> exit <Enter> (To close Unix shell.)

3-17-3 Test Scan


1. Perform scans to verify that they are completed with no errors.

The LFC has now been completed!

3–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-18 INSITE INSTALLATION

For the system with the InSite ONLY, install the InSite AGAIN after LFC.
When performing LFW, InSite installation is NOT required since it is NOT deleted.

3-18-1 General

Prerequisite
D The modem must be powered up.

D Prepare the followings before starting the InSite Installation Procedure.


CD–ROM : 2269719 V/R5.00 Service Software (Must be prepared by FE, distributed through TAB 287.)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 30 minutes

3-18-2 Installing InSite software


1. To display the desktop menu:
Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.

2. Insert the InSite CD–ROM into the CD–ROM drive.

3. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software button located on the upper right of the screen.

4. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” message appears.


Click on Yes.

5. “Do you install Class M Service Software 5.00?” message appears.


Click on Yes.
The InSite software loading procedures is started. It takes a few minutes to complete.

3–45 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-18-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)


6. “Installation complete.” message appears.
Click on OK.

7. On the desktop menu, click on Shell button located on the upper right of the screen.

8. Type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

9. On the desktop menu, click on Install InSite button located on the upper right of the screen.
A few seconds later, the InSite Interactive Platform Configuration screen appears.

10. Click on ACCEPT three times.


Illustration 3–2 InSite Interactive Platform Configuration Screen

3–46 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-18-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)

NOTICE
After entering InSite Setup Screen, call the local support center to set up the InSite together.

GEMS – Americas GEMS – Europe GEMS – Asia


CT National Support Center European Support Center Asia Support Center
Phone: 1–800–321–7937 (33) 1 3083 1300 81–426–56–0033
FAX: (262)896–2710 (33) 1 3070 9970 81–426–56–0053

11. After a moment, the InSite Setup Screen appears.


Click on InSite Checkout tag.

Illustration 3–3 InSite Setup Screen

3–47 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-18-3 Setting up InSite Checkout

NOTICE
VERY IMPORTANT: You MUST run the checkout in order to establish the InSite connection.
Checkout MUST be rerun in the event of a system re–load.

1. The InSite Checkout Screen appears.


Click on CHECKOUT NOW.

Illustration 3–4 InSite Checkout Screen

3–48 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-18-3 Setting up InSite Checkout (Continued)


2. The “Configure InSite Now” window appears.

3. Click on OK.

Illustration 3–5 Configure InSite Now Window

4. To perform an InSite checkout, call your local technical support center.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
The OLC Checkout procedure depends on whether or not a customer’s system has iLinq li-
cense. For a iLinq–licensed system, verify that iLinq icon is seen next to the Service Icon
after the checkout has been successfully completed.

5. When the checkout process has been completed successfully, you might get some messages such as “InSite
Dial out Check completed Successfully” from a local support center.

3–49 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-18-4 Completing the insite installation


1. Click on Exit to complete the InSite installation.

Illustration 3–6 Closing the InSite Setup

InSite has now been installed!


3-18-5 Saving InSite Information
The configuration files for Class–M software and InSite features are saved to MOD as part of the Save System State
process.

1. Set the write protect tab of the MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.

2. On the desktop menu, click on Savestate.

3. Click on Confirm.

4. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

5. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

6. Press the eject button of the MOD drive to eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

7. Click on Startup.

8. Verify that the system starts up with no error.

3–50 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-19 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

3-19-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips


According to the following flow chart, perform OS installation troubleshooting. When an error can not be recovered,
contact your local technical support center.

Message displayed during Miniroot Loading

A trouble occurs dur- Enter ‘c’ to continue booting the old miniroot with no state fixup.
ing OS installation. Enter ‘f’ to fix miniroot install state, and try again.
Enter ‘r’ to reload the miniroot.
Enter ‘a’ to abort (cancel) the installation.
Enter your selection and press ENTER (c, f, r, or a)

Does the mes-


sage above ap- Yes
pears during
miniroot load- Enter “ r ”.
Was the trouble
recovered?
Yes

ing?

No
No

Power OFF the OC main


switch, then ON Again.
Perform the HDD labeling Refer to the procedure
procedures. described in the follow-
ing page.

Was the trouble Yes


recovered?

No

Refer to the procedure


Format the HDD. It described in the follow-
takes approx. 3 hours!! ing page.

NOTICE: Since the HDD might be


physically damaged even if a trouble
was recovered, you should replace
the HDD as soon as possible.
Was the trouble Yes
recovered?

No

Replace the HDD. Return to the LFC procedures.

3–51 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

HDD Labeling Procedures

NOTICE
When an error occur during OS loading procedures and the system can not recover from it.,
perform the following steps a to d (This procedure performs both label and repartition of the
HDD to load the install program on the HDD.)

a. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

b. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

c. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version x.x ARCS xxxx, xxxx


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> l/c/a <ENTER> (l: Label, c: Create, a: All)
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>

label info has changed for disk dksc (0,1,0). write out changes?(yes)
<ENTER>

d. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)

3–52 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format a System HDD


Note
It takes approximately 3 hours!!

NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!

1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.


Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

3. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

4. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

5. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

6. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> d <ENTER>

3–53 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format a System HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> fo <ENTER>

fx/debug/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current)


<ENTER>
.........
..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>

Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 3 hours to format a 9GB HDD.

7. Verify that “format completed successfully” message appears.

8. Type the following to start the repartition procedures:

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> .. <ENTER>

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> ro <ENTER>

fx/repartition/rootdrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>


Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

3–54 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format a System HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>

9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot. (Proceed to Section 3-7-1, Loading Miniroot (Installation
tool).)

3–55 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format an Image HDD


Note
It takes approximately 3 hours!!

NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!

1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.


Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

3. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

4. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

5. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

6. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) 2 <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> d <ENTER>

3–56 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format an Image HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> fo <ENTER>

fx/debug/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current)


<ENTER>
.........
..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>

Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 3 hours to format a 9GB HDD.

7. Verify that “format completed successfully” message appears.

8. Type the following to start the repartition procedures:

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> .. <ENTER>

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> o <ENTER>

fx/repartition/optiondrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>


Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

3–57 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format an Image HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>

9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot to perform LFC. (Proceed to Section 3-7-1, Loading Mini-
root (Installation tool).)

3–58 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips


The following is a summary of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print that was gathered during software testing
and validation of the DICOM Print feature.

ERROR BRINGING UP THE CAMERA INSTALLATION/FILMING APPLICATION


D Symptom: After creating/modifying the DICOM Print Camera the install camera interface does not come
up and the filming application indicates it cannot bring up the film composer.
Cause: The configuration field contains invalid information such as a backslash (\) as the final character
in the field or brackets ({}).

D Solution: The camera.dev file in “~ctuser/app–defaults/devices” must be manually edited to remove the
offending characters in the set configuration line. Invalid characters include \{}

CONFIGURATION INFORMATION FIELD


D Symptom: Cannot view the entire configuration field (> 25 characters)

D Solution: Hold down the middle mouse button and move the field contents

NEED TO SET DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES NOT SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE


D Symptom: User wants the white border around each image box ON/OFF permanently for this system
and it cannot be set as the default for the camera.

D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/app–
defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
For Trim Off – set TRIM NO
For Trim On – set TRIM YES

D Symptom: DICOM Print Camera supports multiple film sizes and the User only wants to print if the Film
Size is correct for [14x17]. [Otherwise the camera will queue the films or return an error causing the queue
to pause (based upon the DICOM Print Camera specifications).]

D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/app–
defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
To force a 14x17 film size – set filmSize 14INX17IN

a. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Applica-
tion Shutdown –> OK.

b. Click on Shell.

3–59 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (Continued)


c. Type as follows:

> cd /usr/g/ctuser/app–defaults/devices <Enter>


> ls *.dev <Enter>
camera.dev (This is the file for a laser imager.)
di3.dev (Example; This is the file for DICOM printer.)
xxx.dev (Example; another DICOM printer)
> nedit di3.dev <Enter> (Example; the current DICOM printer is “di3.dev”.)

d. Add the following line to the dev file for the current DICOM printer.

#first the obligatory fields

set dName ”di3”


set dPort 104
set dComment ””
set dType digital
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType DICM
set dQueueName dicom
set dAppTitle ”di3”
set dIPAddress X.XX.XXX.XXX
set dHostName di3
set filmSize 14INX17IN (Add this line here!)

#then the optional fields

e. Select File –> Save.

f. Type exit <Enter> to terminate the shell window.

NEED TO PREVENT DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES FROM BEING SENT TO DICOM PRINT CAMERA
D Symptom: Some DICOM Print attributes are optional, and may result in fatal errors. For example, the
Fuji camera does not support the Empty Image Density parameter for the film box.

D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line(s) to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/
app–defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
– To prevent sending the Smoothing Parameter set FB_Smooth FALSE
– To prevent sending the Border Density set FB_Border FALSE
– To prevent sending the Empty Image Density set FB_EID FALSE
– To prevent sending the Minimum Density set FB_MinD FALSE
– To prevent sending the Trim Parameter set FB_Trim FALSE

3–60 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (Continued)

ERROR TRYING TO CONNECT TO THE DICOM PRINT CAMERA


D Symptom: DICOM Print server can be reached (ping), but Application error indicates “Unable to start film-
ing interface” and the help message talks about running the install.dasm (Association Error)

D Solution: The system is unable to complete the association. Check the AE Title and the Port number of
the DICOM Print Server and correct them using reconfiguration, CT Camera setting screen.

FILM COMPOSER ERROR NOT USABLE


D Symptom: Film Composer error says ”unrecognized status – code 0”

D Solution: Review the log file, the attention and status windows. These areas have the correct filming sta-
tus (e.g. film jam, supply empty)

DEBUGGING CONNECTION ISSUES DIFFICULT


D Symptom: The timeouts for the DICOM Print are very long, which means one needs to wait a long time
before you know the application is not working.

D Solution: The timeouts for the DICOM Print were setup to ensure that the system would work regardless
of whether the DICOM Print Camera was on a LAN or a WAN halfway around the world. The DICOM Print
timeouts for the association and DIMSE classes (e.g. N–GET, N–DELETE) can be modified within the
DICOM Print camera installation. They can be reduced down to 90 seconds.

DICOM PRINT ERROR ON N–GET TIMEOUT CONFUSING


D Symptom: When the N–GET timeout goes off, the error message in the prslog file will be “Could not get
printer status, invalid command sequence for N–GET”.

D Solution: When the User sees the above error they may want to consider that the issue may be an inactiv-
ity timer on the N–GET DIMSE Service.

DICOM PRINT CAMERA SLIDE SUPPORT


D Symptom: Current implementation of DICOM Print does not allow selection of slide format.

D Solution: Feature not currently supported. Possibly in future releases.

CONFUSION ON FILM FORMAT NOTATION


D Symptom: GEMS Laser Camera and DICOM Print film format notations are opposite.

D Solution: GEMS Laser Camera film format notation has always been
– row x col (e.g. 12 on 1 = 4x3)
– DICOM Print Standard film format notation is
– col x row (e.g. 12 on 1 = 3x4)

3–61 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-20 APPENDIX

3-20-1 Entering the Machine Number


Enter Machine #, complying with the instructions below.

1. Write down the System serial No. printed on the label on the rear left of the PDU.
If a customer’s PDU does NOT have such a label, the label might exist into the accessory box which has been
shipped with the system.

System Serial Number

2. Determine Machine # in accordance with the table below and enter it into Machine # in the system setting screen.
For the example above, “47084” must be entered as a Machine #.

Products System Serial Number Machine #


(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)

CT HiSpeed NPZAYxxxCT 48xxx


LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPZBYxxxCT 47xxx
NPZCYxxxCT 46xxx
NPZDYxxxCT 45xxx
NPLAYxxxCT 44xxx
NPLBYxxxCT 43xxx
NPLCYxxxCT 42xxx
NPLDYxxxCT 41xxx
(Continued)

3–62 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-20-1 Entering Machine Number (Continued)

Products System Serial Number Machine #


(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)

CT HiSpeed NPLEYxxxCT 40xxx


LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPLFYxxxCT 39xxx
NPLGYxxxCT 38xxx
NPFAYxxxCT 37xxx
NPFBYxxxCT 36xxx
NPFCYxxxCT 35xxx
NPFDYxxxCT 34xxx
NPFEYxxxCT 33xxx
NPFGYxxxCT 32xxx
NPFFYxxxCT 31xxx
NPDAYxxxCT 30xxx
NPDBYxxxCT 29xxx
NPDCYxxxCT 28xxx
NPDDYxxxCT 27xxx
NPDEYxxxCT 26xxx
NPDGYxxxCT 25xxx
NPDFYxxxCT 24xxx
NPMCYxxxCT 23xxx
NPMDYxxxCT 22xxx
NPMEYxxxCT 21xxx
XJNPYxxxCT 20xxx
ACTAYxxxCT 19xxx
XJNTYxxxCT 18xxx
NPPJYxxxCT 17xxx
NPPLYxxxCT 16xxx
NPPNYxxxCT 15xxx
NPPUYxxxCT 14xxx
(Continued)

3–63 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

3-20-1 Entering Machine Number (Continued)

Products System Serial Number Machine #


(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)

CT HiSpeed NPPPYxxxCT 13xxx


LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPPSYxxxCT 12xxx
NPPVYxxxCT 11xxx
NPPTYxxxCT 10xxx
NPNSYxxxCT 9xxx
NPNTYxxxCT 8xxx
NPNUYxxxCT 7xxx
NPNXYxxxCT 6xxx
NPMAYxxxCT 5xxx
NPMBYxxxCT 4xxx
NPPAYxxxCT 3xxx
NPPEYxxxCT 2xxx
NPNMYxxxCT 1xxx
CT HiSpeed NX/i, NX/iPro NPTAYxxxCT 4xxx
NPTBYxxxCT 3xxx
NPTCYxxxCT 2xxx
NPTDYxxxCT 1xxx

3–64 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

SECTION 4 – SOFTWARE LOADING


FOR V/R 4.XX

Compatible with Version 4.xx System Software


IMPORTANT NOTE:
Use this instructions when:
D Performing the System Version–up (LFC) or Revision–up (LFW)
D Replacing the HDD with a new one (LFC)

IMPORTANT NOTE:
D When using the Aurora as serial port expander, V/R 4.14 or later is required.
D When changing from ST–1800 to Aurora, “Reconfig” must be performed to select Aurora
in Hardware setting screen.

4-1 GENERAL

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS THE UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER
BEFORE YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.

This ‘Software Loading’ describes the Load–From–Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading (OS +
application) procedure (Load–From–Cold : LFC) and Load–From–Warm (LFW) procedure only for NP application
loading from CD–ROMs and some MODs to the system hard disk.

Shaded paragraph shown in this section means that this might happens depending on a system.

CAUTION
Make sure that all Images have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD before perform-
ing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re–initialize all system
data disk, erasing all images and scan data.

4–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-1 General (Continued)


An LFC/LFW procedures are outlined in Illustration 4–1.

NOTICE
If system version is returned to old version, the LFC procedure MUST be used. (Do NOT use
the LFW procedure.)

NOTICE
When the V/R 4.x is installed:
Depending on the system, the CD–ROM jumper setting might be changed. Refer to the OC
Jumper setting, CD–ROM of this manual.

Illustration 4–1 Software Loading Standard Procedure

Procedures Prerequisite
LFC LFW

1 Saving Patient Data Two blank MODs


2 Saving System State Data None A blank MOD
3 Recording Camera Data –
4 Recording InSite Information None –
5 Saving Option Information –
6 Shutdown the System None –
7 Installing System Software (OS) None Two CD–ROMs: Core
* Loading Installation Tool OS
* Disk Partitioning and OS Installa-
tion
8 Installing Application Software CD–ROM(s): Applica-
tion Software
9 System Configuration – Phase 1 (preconfig)
Restoring the System Configuration Data MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
10 System Configuration – Phase 2 (auxconfig)
Initiating Configuration –
Restoring the System State Data MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
Restoring the Option Key –
Ejecting Application CD–ROM and MOD –
(Continued)

4–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-1 General (Continued)

Procedures Prerequisite
LFC LFW
11 Installing the Revision–up (Patch) software
Loading Revision–up (Patch) software CD–ROM : (Patch)
Software
Patch Verification –
12 Restoring the System State Data AGAIN! MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
13 Editing the File –
14 Changing System Configuration (Reconfig) –
15 Option Check –
16 Starting Up the System NOW! –
17 Completing the LFC / LFW Procedures
Restoring Patient Data MODs in which the
images or raw data
have been saved
Setting CRT Gamma Value –
Test Scan –
18 Installing the InSite Software None CD–ROM : Service
Software

4–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-2 PREPARATION

Prepare the followings before starting the LFC/LFW Procedure.

D CD–ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2) (for LFC Only)

D CD–ROM : Application Software

D CD–ROM : Patch Software (if required)

D CD–ROM : 2250104 V/R4.00 Service Software (if required)

D Option MOD (if new options are installed)

D 2 MODs (Must be prepared by FE)

– For Saving System State Data (one MOD’s A side)

– For Saving Patient Images (another MOD’s A side)

– For Saving Raw Data (another MOD’s B side)

Note
5 inches 2.3 GB MOD for HiSpeed Series and 3.5 inches 540MB MOD for CT/e, ProSpeed AI/FI
Series are required.

NOTICE
Always use a 5 inch 2.3GB MOD media. A 1.2GB or 600MB MOD can NOT be used when sav-
ing data.

Note
For the MODs to save system state data or patient images, they do NOT need to be manually for-
matted. (A used–MOD is available.) This means that the format procedures will be automatically
started before saving data.

4–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA

CAUTION
Make sure that all Images and raw data have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD
before performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). Both LFC and LFW proce-
dures will re–initialize all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.

Prerequisite
D Two blank MOD

Note
Patient Image data and Raw data MUST be saved on the different MODs.

Procedures
1. If required, save the Patient image on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Selection (e.g.
select all examination) –> Archive –> (Label) –> Save examination)
After saving image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.

2. If required, save the raw data on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. The MOD must be initialized first when
using a new MOD. (Scan –> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata Function –> Function Selection –> Save to
MOD –> Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Save)

4–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section (because it will be saved in Section 4-10-2, Software Installa-
tion (For LFW procedure)) and go to Section 4-5, Recording Camera Data.

Prerequisite
D One blank MOD

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

Procedures
Before beginning the software install, save the system state data.

1. Verify that the system is powered ON.

2. Set the write protect tab of the MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.

3. Select Service –> System Tools –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate.

4. Click on Confirm.

5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

Note
The following will be saved as a system state data.
– Option key information
– Log files (log for success/failure when saving/restoring software sets)
– Scan protocol files
– IOS preferences
– Calibration files
– Autovoice files
– Next patient exam number
– User preferences
– InSite information
– Tube usage information

7. Press the eject button of the MOD drive to eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

4–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-5 RECORDING CAMERA DATA (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH CAMERA ONLY)

Depending on the system software version below, the camera setting data MUST be written down since the LFC/LFW
procedures delete these data.

Software V/R Must the camera data be


saved?
Current V/R Reloaded V/R
4.1 (or later) 4.1 (or later) No (not deleted)
4.0 (or lower) 4.1 (or later) Yes
4.0 (or lower) 4.0 (or lower) Yes

1. On the desktop menu, click on Reconfig button located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration menu appears.

2. Select Camera.

3. Write down the Camera setting data using the following table:

Items Specifications
Do you have a ? Laser Camera DICOM Print Camera
When Laser Camera is selected:
Laser Camera Type
DASM Interface Analog Digital
Options Slides Zoom
Film Smooth Sharp
Film Formats Default When upgrading from V/R 3.x to V/R 4.x: You do not need to save this
parameter, since this is automatically saved/restored. The film configura-
tion menu of V/R 4.x does NOT contain this option.
When DICOM Print Camera is selected:
DICOM Print Camera Types
Network Parameters Host Name:
IP Address:
AE Title:
TCP Listen Port:
Comments:
Destination
Orientation
Medium Type
Magnification Type
(Continued)

4–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-5 Saving Camera Data (Continued)

Items Specifications
Image Quality Parameters: Smoothing Type:
Configuration:
Minimum Density:
Maximum Density:
Empty Density:
Border Density:
Network TimeOut Parameters Association:
Session:
Nset:
Naction:
Ncreate:
Ndelete:
Nget:

4. Select Quit to terminate the camera setting window.

5. Select Quit –> OK to return to the desktop menu.

4–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-6 RECORDING INSITE INFORMATION (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH INSITE ONLY)

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 4-7, Saving Option Information.

Note
For system with V/R 4 already installed, skip this section and go to Section 4-7, Saving Option Infor-
mation.

NOTICE
When the system will be upgraded from V/R 3.x to V/R 4.x, th InSite Information shown in the
table 3–1 can NOT be automatically saved.
Therefore, the following Information MUST be written down before upgrading the system
software.

Table 3–1 InSite Information Check Sheet

Item Specifications
Dial Prefix
Dial Type
Modem currently installed

1. On the desktop menu, click on Reconfig button located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration menu appears.

2. Click on InSite.
After a moment, the InSite Proprietary Screen appears.
Move the cursor in the window area, then type P? <Return>.

4–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-6 Recording InSite Information (Continued)


3. After a few seconds, the InSite Install Utility Screen will appear.
Click on INSTALL.

4. The Proactive Diagnostics Install Screen will appear.


Click on DEFAULT.

4–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-6 Recording InSite Information (Continued)


5. The Health Page Install Screen will appear.
Click on DEFAULT.

6. The Health Page E–mail Configuration Screen will appear.


Then click on ACCEPT.

xxxx.xxxxxxx@gemsa.med.ge.com

4–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-6 Recording InSite Information (Continued)


7. The Dial Prefix Screen will appear.
Write down the Dial Prefix currently selected, on the table 3–1, Check Sheet.
Then click on ACCEPT.

8. Write down the Dial Type currently selected, on the table 3–1, Check Sheet.
Then click on ACCEPT.

4–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-6 Recording InSite Information (Continued)


9. Write down the Modem type currently installed, on the table 3–1, Check Sheet.
Then click on ACCEPT.

USRobotics Courier V.34

10. The Checkout Screen appears. Click on NO to terminate the InSite Installation program.
This returns to the desktop menu.

4–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-7 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION

The option information are normally saved in the system state data. However, they must be written down in the follow-
ing table as a back–up. This table can be used when option data reloading fails.

1. On the desktop menu, click on List Option button located on the upper right of the screen.
Option list will appear.

2. Write down the current “Installed option”.

Option Installed? Option Installed? Option Installed?

3D Dicom MOD Helical 30 Max


Smart Prep Power 200mA Max Helical 60 Max
Smart Recon Power 250mA Max Helical 120 Max
SmartView Power 300mA Max Raw Data 1000 Max
DentaScan Power 350mA Max Remote Tilt
Navigator Power 440mA Max Enhanced Cooling
Helical Plus Fast Scan 0.7 sec Extended FOV
Connect Pro Fast Scan 0.8 sec Performix Tube
Image Disk Fast Scan 1.0 sec Thickness 1mm
Pioneer MOD
Note: Depending on the system, unavailable option might be included in the option list above.

3. Click on Quit to return to the desktop menu.

4. For ConnectPro Option Only:


When a system contains ConnectPro Option, the setting parameters must be recorded. This is used at Section
4-12-3, Restoring the Option key.

a. Click on shell.

b. Enter the following comannds to display the ConnectPro information, then write down them to the table belw.

cat /usr/g/config/WLSystem.cfg
AE_Title HIS Server AE Title
IP_Address HIS Server IP Address
Port_Number HIS Server AE Port #
cat /usr/g/config/WLdcm.cfg
bi_apptitle CT Server AE Title

c. Enter Exit to return to the desktop menu.

4–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-8 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 4-10-2, Installing Application Software, Soft-
ware Loading (LFW procedure).

1. Click on Shutdown on the desktop menu.

Some test programs run. The NO button to be displayed is clicked.

2. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.

3. Click on Restart.

4. Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

Stop for maintenance button


can be clicked instead of press-
ing the ESC key.

5. Press ESC key.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When replacing the HDD with a new one ONLY:
The HDD labeling procedure MUST be performed at this time!!!
Refer to Section 4-21, Troubleshooting Tips, HDD labeling procedures.

4–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-9 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS)

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 4-10-2, Installing Application Software, Soft-
ware Loading (LFW procedure).

Prerequisite
D CD–ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 50 minutes

Procedures

4-9-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool)


1. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. Verify that the LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.

3. Click on Install System Software.

4. Click on Local CD–ROM icon.

5. Click on Install.

Note
The following CD–ROM error might appear, but ignore it.
“dksc1d1vol alert illegal request illegal field in CDB (asc=0x24, asq=0x0) CDB:1aoooc0”

6. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation tools to disk” message appears. (miniroot loading phase) A few minutes later, the screen
will become in black, then “Inst Main Menu” appears.

Note
When some errors occur at this time, refer to Section 4-21-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.

4–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-9-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) (Continued)


Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 7 to 8 might be
skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

7. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Press Enter to invoke C Shell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)

# mkfs –t xfs /dev/rdsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>

******************************* Displayed *******************************


meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************

# exit <Enter>

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

8. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Make new file system on /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 [yes/ne/sh/help]: yes <Enter>


Are you sure? [y/n] (n): y <Enter>
Do you want an EFS or XFS file system? [efs/xfs]: xfs <Enter>
Block size of file system 512 or 4096 bytes? 4096 <Enter>

4–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-9-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation


1. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Inst> admin <Enter>

Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)

# mount /CDROM <Enter>

# /CDROM/bin/makepart <Enter>

2. Verify that the following message are displayed.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Creating disk partitions automatically.
.......
************************************************************************

3. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.
Click on Restart.

Note
Instead of clicking on Restart, pressing ESC key twice goes to step5.

When “/CDROM/bin/makepart [258] xxxxx (coredump)” message appears:

Even if this appears, the partitioning is correctly executed, but a problem lies in executing the shut-
down process.
Therefore, if this happens, switch OFF the OC, wait for a few seconds, then switch ON the OC.
If a error except above occurs, refer to Section 4-21-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.

The window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button appears (shown be-
low).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

Stop for maintenance button


can be clicked instead of press-
ing the ESC key.

4. Press ESC key.

5. Click on Install System Software.

6. Click on Local CD–ROM icon.

4–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-9-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


7. Verify that:

D The CD–ROM (Core OS (1 of 2)) remains into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

D The LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.

8. Click on Install.

9. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation Tools to disk” message appears.

Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 10 to 12 might be
skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

10. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Enter your selection and Press ENTER (c, f, r, or a) r <Enter>


(Procedure for reloading miniroot tool is started. It takes approx. 1 minutes.)

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

11. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Press Enter to invoke C Shell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)

# mkfs –t xfs /dev/rdsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>

******************************* Displayed *******************************


meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************

# exit <Enter>

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

12. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Make new file system on /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 [yes/ne/sh/help]: yes <Enter>


Are you sure? [y/n] (n): y <Enter>
Do you want an EFS or XFS file system? [efs/xfs]: xfs <Enter>
Block size of file system 512 or 4096 bytes? 4096 <Enter>

4–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-9-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


13. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Inst> admin <Enter>

Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)

# mount /CDROM <Enter>

# /CDROM/bin/makedisk <Enter>
(Procedure for system file configuration is started. It takes approx. 15 minutes.)

Note:
The error messages might be displayed when a command “/CDROM/bin/makedisk” is
entered. If this happens, enter a command “/CDROM/bin/makedisk” again to proceed.

14. Verify that the following message will appear.

************* Displayed **************************************************


Installations and removals were successful.
Enter HiSpeed / ProSpeed Series Core OS (2 of 2) CD–ROM...
************************************************************************

a. Enter umount /CDROM . (Note: NOT “ un mount”;


If you would have a mistake to enter “unmout”, enter a proper command
“umount” again!)

b. Press the eject button of the CD–ROM drive to eject the CD–ROM, Core OS (1 of 2), from the CD–ROM drive.

c. Insert the CD–ROM, Core OS (2 of 2), into the CD–ROM drive.

d. Enter mount /CDROM .

e. Enter /CDROM/bin/makedisk2 to install the Core OS (2 of 2).


Installation procedure starts. It takes approx. 7 minutes to complete it.

f. After completion of installing Core OS (2 of 2), verify that the following message will appear.

************* Displayed *************************************************


Installations and removals were successful.
........
Exit from the shell using ‘exit’.
************************************************************************

4–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-9-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


15. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

# exit <Enter>

Admin> exit <Enter>

Inst> exit <Enter>

Automatically reconfiguring the operating system.


Ready to restart the system. Restart? xxxxx y <Enter>
(The screen will become in black.)

NOTICE
Do not remove the OS CD–ROM at this time. It MUST be removed in Section 4-10, Installing
Application Software.

16. Approx. 30 seconds later, “IRIS’s Internet address....” message appears (shown below).

IRIS’s Internet address is the default.


Using standalone network mode.

Note
In the next message, you might see the error message, “ALERT: SCSI hard error on (1,3). scb
0x807aeac0”. This will continues to be displayed for the system with DASM only until the configura-
tion setting is completed. However, this message can be ignored.

The system will automatically login as root.

4–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-10 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Note
For installing the application revision–up (Patch) software, refer to Section 4-13.

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Software

D For LFW ONLY:


One blank MOD (for saving the system state data)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

Procedures

4-10-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure)


1. Double–click on instsw icon.

a. Select the system Product Name.

b. Click Yes.
(Pressing No returns to the Select Product window.)

“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears and the OS CD–ROM will be ejected from the
CD–ROM drive.

2. Insert the CD–ROM (application software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 7 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.

NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 4-12-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM.

4–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-10-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure)


1. On the desktop menu, click on LFW located on the upper right of the screen.

2. Click on Yes in response to “Do you really want to do LFW?”

3. Set the write protect tab of the blank MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the
OC.

4. Click on Confirm.
The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

7. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.

8. Select the system Product Name.

9. Click Yes.
(Pressing No returns to the Select Product window.)

“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears.

10. Insert the CD–ROM (application software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 7 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.

NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 4-12-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM.

4–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-10-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) (Continued)


Note
Depending on the system, the following steps 11 might be skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.

11. Select “Copy the environment from the selected machine” then click on OK if the following window
appears:

<Desktop Environment setup>


You have logged in to the following system(s) in the past, on which your
home directory is mounted.

“IRIS”

Choose how you want your environment to be setup.


– Create a new environment.
– Copy the environment from the selected machine.
– Share (link) the environment with the selected machine.

To skip this window at login, check below:


– Always create, copy, or share as chosen above.

4–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG)

NOTICE
Do not check or change system configuration at this time
(preconfig phase). It is performed at section 4-16, Chang-
ing System Configuration (Reconfig).
Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 4-4)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

4-11-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data


1. Double–click on Preconfig icon located at the upper right of the screen.
2. “Insert mod and press confirm!” message appears.
Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 4-4, into the MOD drive.
3. Click on Confirm.
4. Click on Continue icon a few times. The system setting screen appears.
5. Click on Accept. (Nothing changes.)
The system is rebooted. It takes approx. 7 minutes.

4–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-12 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2–AUXCONFIG)

Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 4-4)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 7 minutes

4-12-1 Initiating Configuration


1. Double–click on auxconfig icon.

2. The Date entry screen appears.

D When modifying date, click on Set, then Quit.

D When not–modifying date to proceed, click on Quit.

The system configuration procedures are started, then automatically login as root.

4-12-2 Restoring System State Data

Procedures
1. “Restore System State data (Click on No if no saved data exists)?” appears. Click on Yes.

2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Verify that the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
4-4, is inserted into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.

3. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

4. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.
It takes approx. 3 minutes.

5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.


Go to section 4-12-3, Restoring Option Key.

4–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-12-3 Restoring Option Key

Prerequisite
D None

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 3 minutes

Procedures

Do NOT touch any soft buttons ex-


The option installation procedures automatically starts.
cept for entry described in Note!
After completing automatic installation for option, the system shuts down, then starts up automatically. Then go to
Section 4-12-4, Ejecting the CD–ROM.

Note
When the system contains the following options, the proper entry must be required.

D Denta Option:
1. Power ON a camera connected to the CT system.
2. “The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera ...” message appears. Enter y
3. “Please select a printer in the list....” message appears. Select a proper printer.
4. Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film.
5. “Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous step.

Note
Entry must be performed in unit of mm. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch value to mm
value using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm”

D ConnectPro Option:
ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters written down in 4-7, Saving Option Information,
then click on Accept.

D Raw Data 1000 Max Option:


“All scan data has been removed” message appears. Click on OK .

4–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-12-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD


1. “Auto–Start Disabled” window appears. Click on OK.

2. In desktop menu, select Shell and type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

3. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

4–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-13 INSTALLING REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE

If the system has a revision–up (patch) software, it must be installed at this time.
If it does not, skip this section, then go to section 4-16, Changing System Configuration (reconfig).

4-13-1 Loading revision–up software


This is the common procedures for system revision–up.

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Revision–up (Patch) Software

Procedures
1. Insert the CD–ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software located on the upper right of the screen.

3. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” message appears. Click on Yes.

4. “Do you install selected Patch?” message appears. Click on Yes.


The patch installation procedures are automatically started.

5. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful. xxxxxxx”.

6. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.

7. Type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

4–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-13-2 Patch Verification


1. Click on List S/W Package.
2. Click on Patch.
3. Verify that information for the patch installed are displayed. (Example)
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Patch NPP41001: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 4.11
Patch NPP41002: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 4.12
Patch NPP41003: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 4.13
************************************************************************

4. Click on Close.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

4–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-14 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN!

When performing the LFC/LFW, manually restore the system state data AGAIN at this time.
Do NOT start up the system yet!

Note
Refer to Section 4-22, Appendix for the reason why the system state data must be restored again.

Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 4-4)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 2 minutes

Procedures
1. In desktop menu, select Restorestate.

2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
4-4, into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.

3. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

4. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.

5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

6. Eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

4–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-15 EDITING THE FILE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 4.0X ONLY)

The following patch procedures must be performed for the system with V/R 4.0x ONLY. For the system with 4.1 or
later, skip this section, then go to Section 4-16, Changing System Configuration (Reconfig).

1. Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.

2. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% su <Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> nedit /usr/g/scripts/poweron <Enter>

3. Select Search –> Find.

4. The Find window appears. Move the cursor into the Find window, then enter ST1800 , then click on Find.

NOTICE
If the cursor is left in the script window, the script
will be rewritten so that the system can not be
started up.
5. Select Search –> Find Again four times to display “# do ST1800 test” in the window.

6. Enter # (comment–out) at the head of the following lines:


These lines start from 13 lines under “# do ST1800 test”.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


# set retval [catch {exec scsicontrol –D –d sc${controller} d${scsiid}l0 } results]
# if { [string first $errorCode NONE ] == –1 } {
# .linstres configure –test “ST–1800 : Error”
# set statStr “\nST–1800 : Error\n”
# place forget .linst
# place .linst –x 400 –y 400 –width 400 –height 100
# set error 1
# set st1800_result Error
# update
# } else {
.linstres configure –text “ST–1800 : Ok” (Do not add “#” in this line.)
set statStr “\nST–1800 : Ok\n” (Do not add “#” in this line.)
set st1800_result Ok (Do not add “#” in this line.)
# }
************************************************************************

7. Select File –> Save.

8. Select File –> Exit.

4–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-15 Editing the File (For the System with V/R 4.0x ONLY) (Continued)
9. Move the mouse in the shell window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% poweron <Enter>

10. Verify that the power–on test is performed and system returns to the desktop menu with no error.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

4–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Reconfig)

The System configuration data MUST be checked or changed when a different version of the application software
has been loaded, because new setting(s) might be added in a new version of software.

4-16-1 Configuration Setup

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 15 minutes

1. In desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration screen appears.

2. Enter the appropriate configuration data.

NOTICE
The following items restrict the use of characters for entry. Do NOT use other characters.

Items Characters Usable for Entry


Hospital Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), period (.), comma (,), and space
Machine # numerics (0–9)
Station Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), and period (.)

4–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


3. System Setting Screen:

a. Changes Hospital Name to the site’s preferred name.

b. Select the Timezone for this site, and record it below.

Time Zone

c. Verify Model Name.

d. Verify Machine # .
The unique machine number must be entered according to the table in section 4-22-2, Entering the Machine
Number.

e. Verify/change Station Name. (Entry MUST be performed using up to 4 characters.)

Note
The Model Name is currently not implemented.

f. Select Preferences to proceed to the next screen.

4–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


4. Preferences Setting Screen:

a. Select Time Format to be displayed on screen.

b. Select Units for patient weight for units for patient weight to be displayed on images.

4–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


c. Select Auto mA. Select Target SD1 for higher mA, Target SD2 for middle mA, or Target SD3 for lower mA
according to the following mA table.
GE recommends “Target SD1” for Japan and “Target SD2” for countries other than Japan, but this
selection depends on a customer’s preferences. If a customer requires a different image quality, select an
other Target SD.

Auto mA modes

IQ High mA (High IQ)


SD1
Normal
IQ
SD2 Low Dose
Normal
IQ
SD3
Low Dose
Normal
Low Dose
Low mA (Low IQ)

Target SD IQ Level
For V/R 3.x system For V/R 4.x or later system
SD IQ SD1 IQ 1.63
SD Normal SD1 Normal 1.47
– SD2 IQ 1.40
SD Low Dose SD1 Low Dose 1.33
– SD2 Normal 1.26
– SD3 IQ 1.22
– SD2 Low Dose 1.14
– SD3 Normal 1.10
– SD3 Low Dose 1.0
Note: V/R 3.x SD and V/R 4.x or later SD1 are equal in IQ level.

d. Select Date Format to be displayed on images.

Note
To use Japanese era for date, YY/MM/DD format must be selected.

e. For HiSpeed Series ONLY:


Select Bone Kernel. (default: Type 1)

Note
“Type 2” is less artifact, but lower resolution than Type 1.

f. Select Language to proceed to the next screen.

4–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


5. Language Setting Screen:

a. Select the Language for this site.

b. Select Default Autovoice Language for this site.

c. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.

4–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


6. Hardware Setting Screen:

a. Select a proper Filter Type, depending on the system.

D Solarix (NP) for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M

D Solarix (NP) SmartFilter should be selected for the system with SmartFilter Option
When the SmartFilter Option label has been attached at the OC rear cover, select this filter type.
Note: This option is standard for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M from ’99 FW44 production.

D Performix SmartFilter for HiSpeed ZX/i Series

D Venus SmartFilter for ProSpeed AI / FI Series and CT/e

b. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).

c. Select a proper Keyboard, depending on the system.

d. Select a proper Serial Expander, depending on the system.

4–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


e. Click on Diagnosis Settings.
Type the following responses to the indicated messages:

Supported product types


a. NP
b. NPTWIN
Enter product type (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select “a.NP” for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, ZX/i, ProSpeed AI/FI, CT/e

NRE Global memory sizes


a. 16Mb
b. 32Mb
c. 64Mb
Enter GM option (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select “b.32Mb” for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, ZX/i, ProSpeed AI/FI, CT/e

Enter # of Slave DSP? xx <Enter>


Enter a twice numbers of the NPRS boards inside the OC. See table below.

Number of NPRS Entry


1 2
2 4
4 8
8 16

ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
HiSpeed Series

ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ

NPRS
NPRM

Nest

Is this info correct (y=yes, n=no)? y <Enter>

Note
If you enter a wrong memory size, select [n] to start over the entry.

f. Select Camera to proceed to the next screen.

4–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


7. Camera Setting Screen:

a. When Laser Camera is selected:

Laser Camera Setting Screen:

Set the following parameters:

D Laser Camera Type : Choose the closest option.

D DASM Interface : This option must match your physical DASM type; for DASM–LCAM, select Digital.
For DASM–VDB, select Analog.

D Do NOT select Slides or Zoom. Use Film Composer –> Options –> Slide formats when selecting this
parameter, because the Film composer option overrides the System configuration option.

D Smooth/Sharp selects sharper or smoother image interpolation.

Click on Accept. Then go to Network Setting Screen.

4–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


b. When DICOM Print Camera is selected:

Note
For a summery of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print, refer to Appendix, 4-21-2

DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips.

DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen: (First Screen)

NOTICE
When entering the DICOM print setting screen again after accepting the settings and quitting
the reconfiguration screen, the settings return to the default ones. This is a software bug,
but the settings are being held in memory.
To check the parameters to be set, use the film composer screen:
Select [Image works] –> [Film] –> [Configure] –> [di3] –> [Update]. This operation display
information of the 1st page of the DICOM Print setting screen. Then, click [Advanced] to dis-
play information of the 2nd page.
On this film composer screen, you MUST NOT modify any parameters!! You can only change
them on the Camera setting screen (reconfiguration).
To exit from the 2nd screen, click [Cancel] –> [Cancel] –> [Done].

4–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


Set the following parameters, then click on Accept. This goes to 2nd setting screen (for setting advanced
parameters) for DICOM Print Camera.

D DICOM Print Camera Type :


Select the appropriate DICOM Print Camera Types selection (Agfa, Imation Print Server,Kodak).
After you select the appropriate Camera Type, the system automatically pre–sets default values into the
Laser Camera Settings area of the window. Verify with the Filming Device Service Representative that
these values match the model of the Filming Device.

D Network Parameters :
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Host Name.
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device IP Address.
Enter the AE Title from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming Device.

NOTICE
When, at the DICOM Print Camera side, you enter the AE title of a CT system connected to
the printer, CT Host Name _DCP must be used.

Note:
Filmer DICOM Application Entity Titles may be site specific. Make sure that you check with the Film-
ing Device Service Representative and the hospital network administrator to ensure you are using
the correct AE Title for the destination Filming Device.

Enter the TCP Listen Port from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming
Device.

D Destination:
Select the appropriate Destination parameter. Check with the radiology department and the Filming De-
vice Service Representative to determine whether to use MAGAZINE or PROCESSOR.

D Orientation:
Select PORTRAIT for the Orientation. Currently, this CT system only supports Portrait.

D Medium Type:
Select the appropriate Medium Type parameter. Check with the radiology department and the
Filming Device Service Representative to determine whether the department is using BLUE
FILM or CLEAR FILM.

4–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


D Magnification Type:
Select the appropriate Magnification Type parameter. This parameter selects the algorithm used to inter-
polate pixels to provide desired film resolution. Check with the Filming Device Service Representative to
ensure the best Image Quality film presentation. For most Filming Device manufacturers, the preferred
selection is CUBIC.

Magnification Type Selection Descriptions:


–NONE: No interpolation. This selection is available for camera types that do not support Magnification
Type algorithms.
– REPLICATE: Adjacent pixels are interpolated which results in images described as “pixelly”. This algo-
rithm is not usually preferred.
–BILINEAR: A first order interpolation of pixels is used which results in images described as blurred. This
algorithm is not usually preferred.
–CUBIC: A third order interpolation is used with a large number of possible formulations. Filming Device
manufacturers define parameters called smoothing type to set coefficients used in the algorithm. The im-
plementation of these coefficients is Filming Device manufacturer dependent.

DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen: (2nd Screen for Advanced Parameters)

4–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


c. Use the Advanced Parameters window to set specific Filming Device Image Quality parameters and select
network time–outs. To ensure these settings are correct, verify all selections with the Filming Device Service
Representative.
Set the following parameters, then click on Accept.

Note
When you want to return to the default setting, click on Reset IQ Parameters or Reset Timeout Pa-
rameters.

D Image Quality Parameters

Smoothing Type:
This parameter is used when the Magnification Type is set to CUBIC. The parameter represents the coeffi-
cient for the image resolution algorithm and is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and must be veri-
fied with the radiology department after filming review.

Recommended Smoothing Type Starting Values & Ranges:


Agfa DryStar (MG3000): Start Value: 140 Range: 137 – 150
Imation Dryview (8700): Start Value: 3 Range: 3 – 13
Kodak Laser Printer 190: Start Value: Enhanced Range: Normal

Configuration:
This parameter is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and is typically used to specify the image con-
trast.
The Configuration field may be up to 1024 characters long. The filed will scroll automatically as characters
are typed. To review the Configuration field if the entire length does not appear in the parameter window,
click and hold down the middle mouse button while the cursor is in the window.

Recommended Configuration Setting Values:


Agfa DryStar (MG3000): PERCEPTION_LUT=KANAMORI (100)
Imation Dryview (8700): LUT=0,7
Kodak Laser Printer 190: CS434\CN0\PD1.20

Minimum and Maximum Density:


These parameters are used to set the brightness for the images on the film. The range of values is 0 –
4095, although the valid range for a specific Filming Device is manufacturer dependent.

Recommended Minimum and Maximum Starting Values:


Agfa DryStar (MG3000): Min: 20 or 23 Max: 300
Imation Dryview (8700): Min: (Blank) Max: 300
Kodak Laser Printer 190: Min: 20 Max: 300

Empty Density:
This parameter sets the density for empty film view ports. Typically, BLACK is used but WHITE is an op-
tion. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.

Border Density:
This parameter sets the density for the border used around the film viewports. Typically, BLACK is used
but WHITE is an option. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.

4–45 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


D Network TimeOut Parameters :

The purpose of these parameters is to terminate the communications if the Filming Device
does not respond within a reasonable amount of time. These values may need to be different
for devices on Wide Area Networks (WANs) versus those on Local Area Networks (LANs). For
DICOM Print Devices, timeouts exist at the Association and Session levels and each of the
DISME Services (N–Create, N–Set, N–Get, N–Delete, N–Action). The timeouts are stated in
seconds with a minimum timeout of 90 seconds.

d. Select Network to proceed to the next screen.

4–46 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


8. Network Settings screen:

GATEWAY

IP ADDRESS

IP ADDRESS

HOST NAME

CT

4–47 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-16-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)


a. Click on Network on.
The check box becomes red.

b. OC Parameters Setting:

i. Enter Host Name.


Host Name identifies the name of this CT. This name must be unique for the site, and will appear in unix
prompts and in a few other places. If you set up a network connection to the site, the OC computer will
appear on the site’s network as <Host Name>.

ii. Enter IP Address.


The IP address is administrated by a network administrator. Ask a network administrator to assign an IP
address.

iii. Enter Net Mask.(if required.)


The Net Mask is to divide the IP address between the network bits and the host bits. The Net Mask is
determined by a network administrator.

c. If this system is not connected to a “Site Subnet” then;

D Verify all other fields are set to the defaults:

OC – Net Mask Gateway – Host Name Gateway – IP Address


255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254

d. If this system is connected to a “Site Subnet” then continue as follows;


Gateway Parameters Setting:

i. Enter the Gateway Parameter (IP Address). If possible consult the site’s network administrator before
configuring the interface to the site’s network. The site administrator should provide the Gateway IP Ad-
dress.

4-16-2 Completing Configuration


1. Click on Accept after completing the configuration.
The system is rebooted and returns to the desktop menu.

2. “Auto–Start Disabled” message appears. Click on OK.

4–48 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-17 OPTION CHECK

1. In desktop menu, select List Options.


The option(s) currently installed is displayed.

2. Using the option list recorded at section 4-7, Saving Option Information, verify that the proper option(s) has been
correctly reloaded to the system.

3. Click on Quit.

4–49 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-18 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW!

1. In desktop menu, select Startup.


After the power–on test, the system will automatically start up.

2. Verify that the system starts up with no error.

3. Confirm that the latest version of software has been installed in the system. The system version is displayed
at the lower right of the screen while the system is starting up.

4. Click on OK in Attention window.

4–50 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-19 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE

4-19-1 Restoring Patient Data


1. Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Archive –> Restore
–> Selection –> All examination –> Restore –> Restore examination –> OK)
After restoring image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.

2. Restore the raw data to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Scan –> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata
Function –> Function Selection –> Restore/Delete from MOD –> (Select all rawdata using shift key.) –>
Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Restore)

4-19-2 Setting CRT Gamma Value


The gamma value for CRT display must be set after system software installation.

1. Click on Service icon located on the upper left screen.

2. Click on System Tools –> Unix Shell.

3. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% su<Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> gamma 1 <Enter> (To modify gamma value to 1.0.)
(Note: One space input is required between inputs of “gamma”
and “1”.)
> gamma <Enter> (To verify that gamma value should be 1.000000.)

> exit <Enter> (To terminate the shell window.)

> exit <Enter> (To close Unix shell.)

4-19-3 Test Scan


1. Perform scans to verify that they are completed with no errors.

The LFC has now been completed!

4–51 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20 INSITE INSTALLATION

For the system with the InSite ONLY, install the InSite AGAIN after LFC.
When performing LFW, InSite installation is NOT required since it is NOT deleted.

4-20-1 General

Prerequisite
D The modem must be powered up.

D Prepare the followings before starting the InSite Installation Procedure.


CD–ROM : 2250104 V/R4.00 Service Software (Must be prepared by FE, distributed through TAB 287.)

D For the system upgraded from V/R 3.x


Prepare the table 3–1, InSite Information Check Sheet, in which you recorded information before LFC.

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 30 minutes

4-20-2 Installing InSite software


1. To display the desktop menu:
Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.

2. Insert the InSite CD–ROM into the CD–ROM drive.

3. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software button located on the upper right of the screen.

4. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” message appears.


Click on Yes.

5. “Do you install Class M Service Software 4.00?” message appears.


Click on Yes.
The InSite software loading procedures is started. It takes a few minutes to complete.

4–52 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)


6. “Installation complete.” message appears.
Click on OK.

7. On the desktop menu, click on Shell button located on the upper right of the screen.

8. Type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

9. On the desktop menu, click on Install InSite button located on the upper right of the screen.
A few seconds later, the InSite Interactive Platform Configuration screen appears.

10. Click on ACCEPT three times.


Illustration 4–2 InSite Interactive Platform Configuration Screen

4–53 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)

NOTICE
After entering InSite Setup Screen, call the local support center to set up the InSite together.

GEMS – Americas GEMS – Europe GEMS – Asia


CT National Support Center European Support Center Asia Support Center
Phone: 1–800–321–7937 (33) 1 3083 1300 81–426–56–0033
FAX: (262)896–2710 (33) 1 3070 9970 81–426–56–0053

11. After a moment, the InSite Setup Screen appears.

D For the System upgraded from V/R 3.x:


Click on ProDiag tag.

D For the System that performed LFC from V/R 4.xx to V/R4.xx:
Click on InSite Checkout tag, then go to Section 4-20-6, Setting up InSite Checkout

Illustration 4–3 InSite Setup Screen

4–54 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-3 Installing Proactive Diagnostics


1. The Proactive Diagnostics Install Screen appears.
Click on DEFAULT.

Illustration 4–4 Proactive Diagnostics Install Screen

4–55 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-4 Health Page Installation Menu


1. Health Page screen appears.
Verify that a proper E–mail address is entered.

Illustration 4–5 Health Page Setting Screen

xxxxx.xxxxxx@gemsa.med.ge.com

2. Click on DEFAULT.

4–56 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-5 Setting Up Modem Configuration


1. Device Connection Screen appears.

Illustration 4–6 Modem Configuration Screen

4–57 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-5 Setting up Modem Configuration (Continued)


D Dial–out Prefix

Enter the Dial–out Prefix, referring to Table 3–1, InSite Information Check Sheet.

D Modem Type

Enter the modem currently installed, referring to Table 3–1, InSite Information Check Sheet.

D CPU Serial Port Name

Do not change this setting.

D Dialing Mode

Enter the Dial type, referring to Table 3–1, InSite Information Check Sheet.

D Country

Verify that the proper country is selected where the CT system has been installed.

D CPU Serial Port Speed

Verify that 115200 is selected as a standard speed.

4–58 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-5 Setting up Modem Configuration (Continued)


2. Click on APPLY.
The Modem Hardware Setting Screen appears.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
Depending on a modem type (Multitech, 3COM, Hayes, ...), the following message might ap-
pears. If it does, click on OK to proceed.

‘Exception:java.io.FileNotFoundException:/usr/g/insite.readme.ModemMultiTech’

Illustration 4–7 Modem Hardware Setting Screen

Note:
The modem hardware setting screen to be displayed depends on the mo-
dem to be connected.

3. Click on OK, the following message should be displayed on the status line of the bottom side of the Modem con-
figuration screen.
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Device Connection : Completed Successfully.
************************************************************************
4. If “Status : Failed” appears, set the CPU Serial Port Speed again to the lower values than currently set.
If this error occurs repeatedly, consult your local technical support center.

4–59 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-6 Setting up InSite Checkout

NOTICE
VERY IMPORTANT: You MUST run the checkout in order to establish the InSite connection.
Checkout MUST be rerun in the event of a system re–load.

1. The InSite Checkout Screen appears.


Click on CHECKOUT NOW.

Illustration 4–8 InSite Checkout Screen

4–60 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-6 Setting up InSite Checkout (Continued)


2. The “Configure InSite Now” window appears.

3. Click on OK.

Illustration 4–9 Configure InSite Now Window

4. To perform an InSite checkout, call your local technical support center.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
The OLC Checkout procedure depends on whether or not a customer’s system has iLinq li-
cense. For a iLinq–licensed system, verify that iLinq icon is seen next to the Service Icon
after the checkout has been successfully completed.

5. When the checkout process has been completed successfully, you might get some messages such as “InSite
Dial out Check completed Successfully” from a local support center.

4–61 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-20-7 Completing the insite installation


1. Click on Exit to complete the InSite installation.

Illustration 4–10 Closing the InSite Setup

InSite has now been installed!


4-20-8 Saving InSite Information
The configuration files for Class–M software and InSite features are saved to MOD as part of the Save System State
process.

1. Set the write protect tab of the MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.

2. On the desktop menu, click on Savestate.

3. Click on Confirm.

4. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

5. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

6. Press the eject button of the MOD drive to eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

7. Click on Startup.

8. Verify that the system starts up with no error.

4–62 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-21 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

4-21-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips


According to the following flow chart, perform OS installation troubleshooting. When an error can not be recovered,
contact your local technical support center.

Message displayed during Miniroot Loading

A trouble occurs dur- Enter ‘c’ to continue booting the old miniroot with no state fixup.
ing OS installation. Enter ‘f’ to fix miniroot install state, and try again.
Enter ‘r’ to reload the miniroot.
Enter ‘a’ to abort (cancel) the installation.
Enter your selection and press ENTER (c, f, r, or a)

Does the mes-


sage above ap- Yes
pears during
miniroot load- Enter “ r ”.
Was the trouble
recovered?
Yes

ing?

No
No

Power OFF the OC main


switch, then ON Again.
Perform the HDD labeling Refer to the procedure
procedures. described in the follow-
ing page.

Was the trouble Yes


recovered?

No

Refer to the procedure


Format the HDD. It described in the follow-
takes approx. 3 hours!! ing page.

NOTICE: Since the HDD might be


physically damaged even if a trouble
was recovered, you should replace
the HDD as soon as possible.
Was the trouble Yes
recovered?

No

Replace the HDD. Return to the LFC procedures.

4–63 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

HDD Labeling Procedures

NOTICE
When an error occur during OS loading procedures and the system can not recover from it.,
perform the following steps a to d (This procedure performs both label and repartition of the
HDD to load the install program on the HDD.)

a. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

b. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

c. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version x.x ARCS xxxx, xxxx


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> l/c/a <ENTER> (l: Label, c: Create, a: All)
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>

label info has changed for disk dksc (0,1,0). write out changes?(yes)
<ENTER>

d. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)

4–64 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format a System HDD


Note
It takes approximately 3 hours!!

NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!

1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.


Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

3. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

4. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

5. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

6. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> d <ENTER>

4–65 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format a System HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> fo <ENTER>

fx/debug/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current)


<ENTER>
.........
..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>

Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 3 hours to format a 9GB HDD.

7. Verify that “format completed successfully” message appears.

8. Type the following to start the repartition procedures:

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> .. <ENTER>

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> ro <ENTER>

fx/repartition/rootdrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>


Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

4–66 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format a System HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>

9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot. (Proceed to Section 4-9-1, Loading Miniroot (Installation
tool).)

4–67 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format an Image HDD


Note
It takes approximately 3 hours!!

NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!

1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.


Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

3. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

4. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

5. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

6. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) 2 <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> d <ENTER>

4–68 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format an Image HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> fo <ENTER>

fx/debug/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current)


<ENTER>
.........
..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>

Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 3 hours to format a 9GB HDD.

7. Verify that “format completed successfully” message appears.

8. Type the following to start the repartition procedures:

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> .. <ENTER>

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> o <ENTER>

fx/repartition/optiondrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>


Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

4–69 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

How to format an Image HDD (Continued)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>

9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot to perform LFC. (Proceed to Section 4-9-1, Loading Mini-
root (Installation tool).)

4–70 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-21-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips


The following is a summary of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print that was gathered during software testing
and validation of the DICOM Print feature.

ERROR BRINGING UP THE CAMERA INSTALLATION/FILMING APPLICATION


D Symptom: After creating/modifying the DICOM Print Camera the install camera interface does not come
up and the filming application indicates it cannot bring up the film composer.
Cause: The configuration field contains invalid information such as a backslash (\) as the final character
in the field or brackets ({}).

D Solution: The camera.dev file in “~ctuser/app–defaults/devices” must be manually edited to remove the
offending characters in the set configuration line. Invalid characters include \{}

CONFIGURATION INFORMATION FIELD


D Symptom: Cannot view the entire configuration field (> 25 characters)

D Solution: Hold down the middle mouse button and move the field contents

NEED TO SET DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES NOT SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE


D Symptom: User wants the white border around each image box ON/OFF permanently for this system
and it cannot be set as the default for the camera.

D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/app–
defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
For Trim Off – set TRIM NO
For Trim On – set TRIM YES

D Symptom: DICOM Print Camera supports multiple film sizes and the User only wants to print if the Film
Size is correct for [14x17]. [Otherwise the camera will queue the films or return an error causing the queue
to pause (based upon the DICOM Print Camera specifications).]

D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/app–
defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
To force a 14x17 film size – set filmSize 14INX17IN

a. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Applica-
tion Shutdown –> OK.

b. Click on Shell.

4–71 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-21-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (Continued)


c. Type as follows:

> cd /usr/g/ctuser/app–defaults/devices <Enter>


> ls *.dev <Enter>
camera.dev (This is the file for a laser imager.)
di3.dev (Example; This is the file for DICOM printer.)
xxx.dev (Example; another DICOM printer)
> nedit di3.dev <Enter> (Example; the current DICOM printer is “di3.dev”.)

d. Add the following line to the dev file for the current DICOM printer.

#first the obligatory fields

set dName ”di3”


set dPort 104
set dComment ””
set dType digital
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType DICM
set dQueueName dicom
set dAppTitle ”di3”
set dIPAddress X.XX.XXX.XXX
set dHostName di3
set filmSize 14INX17IN (Add this line here!)

#then the optional fields

e. Select File –> Save.

f. Type exit <Enter> to terminate the shell window.

NEED TO PREVENT DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES FROM BEING SENT TO DICOM PRINT CAMERA
D Symptom: Some DICOM Print attributes are optional, and may result in fatal errors. For example, the
Fuji camera does not support the Empty Image Density parameter for the film box.

D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line(s) to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/
app–defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
– To prevent sending the Smoothing Parameter set FB_Smooth FALSE
– To prevent sending the Border Density set FB_Border FALSE
– To prevent sending the Empty Image Density set FB_EID FALSE
– To prevent sending the Minimum Density set FB_MinD FALSE
– To prevent sending the Trim Parameter set FB_Trim FALSE

4–72 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-21-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (Continued)

ERROR TRYING TO CONNECT TO THE DICOM PRINT CAMERA


D Symptom: DICOM Print server can be reached (ping), but Application error indicates “Unable to start film-
ing interface” and the help message talks about running the install.dasm (Association Error)

D Solution: The system is unable to complete the association. Check the AE Title and the Port number of
the DICOM Print Server and correct them using reconfiguration, CT Camera setting screen.

FILM COMPOSER ERROR NOT USABLE


D Symptom: Film Composer error says ”unrecognized status – code 0”

D Solution: Review the log file, the attention and status windows. These areas have the correct filming sta-
tus (e.g. film jam, supply empty)

DEBUGGING CONNECTION ISSUES DIFFICULT


D Symptom: The timeouts for the DICOM Print are very long, which means one needs to wait a long time
before you know the application is not working.

D Solution: The timeouts for the DICOM Print were setup to ensure that the system would work regardless
of whether the DICOM Print Camera was on a LAN or a WAN halfway around the world. The DICOM Print
timeouts for the association and DIMSE classes (e.g. N–GET, N–DELETE) can be modified within the
DICOM Print camera installation. They can be reduced down to 90 seconds.

DICOM PRINT ERROR ON N–GET TIMEOUT CONFUSING


D Symptom: When the N–GET timeout goes off, the error message in the prslog file will be “Could not get
printer status, invalid command sequence for N–GET”.

D Solution: When the User sees the above error they may want to consider that the issue may be an inactiv-
ity timer on the N–GET DIMSE Service.

DICOM PRINT CAMERA SLIDE SUPPORT


D Symptom: Current implementation of DICOM Print does not allow selection of slide format.

D Solution: Feature not currently supported. Possibly in future releases.

CONFUSION ON FILM FORMAT NOTATION


D Symptom: GEMS Laser Camera and DICOM Print film format notations are opposite.

D Solution: GEMS Laser Camera film format notation has always been
– row x col (e.g. 12 on 1 = 4x3)
– DICOM Print Standard film format notation is
– col x row (e.g. 12 on 1 = 3x4)

4–73 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-22 APPENDIX

4-22-1 The Reason Why the System State Data Must be Reloaded TWICE
For the system state data, the following principle exists:
The version of the system state data to be restored must be same as or higher than its version to be saved.

The figure below is an example of performing the LFC/LFW for the V/R 4.11 system. The V/R 4.11 system state data
is saved before LFC/LFW. The system state data is automatically reloaded after installing application software, but
this violates the principle described above because of the system V/R 4.10, not 4.11. So, after installing a patch soft-
ware to upgrade the system version to V/R 4.11, the system state data should be manually reloaded again.

For this reason, when performing LFC/LFW and patch software installation, the system state data must be reloaded
twice.

Up to now, a problem does NOT occur even if this principle is NOT strictly followed. However, when upgrading the
system to V/R 4.11, 4.01, 3.02, or 2.55 (Y2K FMI), this principle is required. If it is not followed, a part of the system
state data to be reloaded are destroyed.

NG: Lower OK: Same


Version Version
(4.10) (4.11)

System
4.11 4.10 4.11
Version

Installing
Procedures LFC/LFW a Patch
Software
Automatically

Manually

System
Save Restore Restore
State
Data (V/R 4.11 (V/R 4.11 (V/R 4.11
system system system
state data) state data) state data)

4–74 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-22-2 Entering the Machine Number


Enter Machine #, complying with the instructions below.

1. Write down the System serial No. printed on the label on the rear left of the PDU.
If a customer’s PDU does NOT have such a label, the label might exist into the accessory box which has been
shipped with the system.

System Serial Number

2. Determine Machine # in accordance with the table below and enter it into Machine # in the system setting screen.
For the example above, “47084” must be entered as a Machine #.

Products System Serial Number Machine #


(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)

CT HiSpeed NPZAYxxxCT 48xxx


LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPZBYxxxCT 47xxx
NPZCYxxxCT 46xxx
NPZDYxxxCT 45xxx
NPLAYxxxCT 44xxx
NPLBYxxxCT 43xxx
NPLCYxxxCT 42xxx
NPLDYxxxCT 41xxx
(Continued)

4–75 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-22-2 Entering Machine Number (Continued)

Products System Serial Number Machine #


(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)

CT HiSpeed NPLEYxxxCT 40xxx


LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPLFYxxxCT 39xxx
NPLGYxxxCT 38xxx
NPFAYxxxCT 37xxx
NPFBYxxxCT 36xxx
NPFCYxxxCT 35xxx
NPFDYxxxCT 34xxx
NPFEYxxxCT 33xxx
NPFGYxxxCT 32xxx
NPFFYxxxCT 31xxx
NPDAYxxxCT 30xxx
NPDBYxxxCT 29xxx
NPDCYxxxCT 28xxx
NPDDYxxxCT 27xxx
NPDEYxxxCT 26xxx
NPDGYxxxCT 25xxx
NPDFYxxxCT 24xxx
NPMCYxxxCT 23xxx
NPMDYxxxCT 22xxx
NPMEYxxxCT 21xxx
XJNPYxxxCT 20xxx
ACTAYxxxCT 19xxx
XJNTYxxxCT 18xxx
NPPJYxxxCT 17xxx
NPPLYxxxCT 16xxx
NPPNYxxxCT 15xxx
NPPUYxxxCT 14xxx
(Continued)

4–76 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

4-22-2 Entering Machine Number (Continued)

Products System Serial Number Machine #


(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)

CT HiSpeed NPPPYxxxCT 13xxx


LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPPSYxxxCT 12xxx
NPPVYxxxCT 11xxx
NPPTYxxxCT 10xxx
NPNSYxxxCT 09xxx
NPNTYxxxCT 08xxx
NPNUYxxxCT 07xxx
NPNXYxxxCT 06xxx
NPMAYxxxCT 05xxx
NPMBYxxxCT 04xxx
NPPAYxxxCT 03xxx
NPPEYxxxCT 02xxx
NPNMYxxxCT 01xxx
CT HiSpeed NX/i, NX/iPro NPTAYxxxCT 04xxx
NPTBYxxxCT 03xxx
NPTCYxxxCT 02xxx
NPTDYxxxCT 01xxx

4–77 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

4–78 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

SECTION 5 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 3.XX OR


LOWER

Compatible with Version 3.xx or lower

5-1 GENERAL

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS THE UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER
BEFORE YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.

This ‘Software Loading’ describes the Load–From–Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading (OS +
application) and Load–From–Warm (LFW) procedure only for NP application loading from CD–ROMs and some
MODs to the system hard disk. When the LFC procedure is performed:

CAUTION
Make sure that all Images have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD before perform-
ing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re–initialize all system
data disk, erasing all images and scan data.

An LFC/LFW procedure is outlined in Illustration 5–1.

NOTICE
If system version is returned to old version, the LFC procedure MUST be used. (Do NOT use
the LFW procedure.)

5–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

Illustration 5–1 Software Loading Standard Procedure

LFC
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Procedures

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ LFW
Prerequisite

1 ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Saving Customer Data Two blank MODs
2 Saving System State Data None A blank MOD
3 Saving Camera Data –
4 Shutdown the System None –
5 Disconnecting the SCSI Cable for None –
the optional Pioneer MOD drive.
6 Installing System Software (OS) None CD–ROM(s): Core OS
* Loading Installation Tool
* Disk Partitioning and OS Installa-
tion
7 Installing Application Software CD–ROM(s): Application Soft-
ware
A blank MOD (for LFW only)
8 Connecting the SCSI Cable for the None –
optional Pioneer MOD drive.
9 System Configuration – Phase 1 (preconfig)
Restoring the System Configuration Data MOD in which the system
state data has been saved
10 System Configuration – Phase 2 (auxconfig)
Initiating Configuration –
Restoring the System State Data MOD in which the system
state data has been saved
Restoring the Option Key MOD in which the system
state data has been saved
Ejecting Application CD–ROM and MOD –
11 Installing the Application Revision–up (Patch) software
Loading Revision–up (Patch) software CD–ROM : Application Revi-
sion–up (Patch) Software
Patch Verification –
When performing LFC/LFW for 3.02 ONLY: MOD in which the system
Restoring the System Stage Data AGAIN! state data has been saved
For V/R 4.0x system ONLY: –
Editing the file
(continued)

5–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

Illustration 5–1 Software Loading Standard Procedure (Continued)

LFC
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Procedures

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ LFW
Prerequisite

12
13
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Changing System Configuration (Reconfig)
Starting Up the System


14 Completing the LFC/LFW Procedures
Restoring Customer Data MODs in which the images or
raw data have been saved
15 Setting CRT Gamma Value –
16 For V/R 2.02 or lower system ONLY: –
Selecting Auto Voice Language
17 For V/R 1.20 Japanese system ONLY: –
Displaying Japanese Message

5–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-2 PREPARATION
Prepare the followings before starting the LFC/LFW Procedure.

D CD–ROM : Core OS (OS) (for V/R 3.xx or lower system)

D CD–ROM : Application Software

D Option MOD (if new options are installed)

D 2 MODs (5 inches 2.3 GB)

– For Saving System State Data (one MOD’s A side)

– For Saving Patient Images (another MOD’s A side)

– For Saving Raw Data (another MOD’s B side)

NOTICE
For the system with 5 inch MOD drive, 1.2GB or 600MB MOD can NOT be used when saving
data.

Note
For the MODs to save system state data, patient images, and raw data, they do NOT need to be
manually formatted. (A used–MOD is available.) This means that the format procedures will be auto-
matically started before saving data.

5-3 SAVING CUSTOMER DATA

CAUTION
Make sure that all Images and raw data have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD
before performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re–ini-
tialize all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.

Prerequisite
D Two MOD (5 inches 2.3 GB)

Note
Patient Image data and Raw data MUST be saved on the different MODs.

Procedures
1. If required, save the Patient image on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Selection (e.g.
select all examination) –> Archive –> (Label) –> Save examination)
After saving image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.

2. If required, save the raw data on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. The MOD must be initialized first. (Scan
–> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata Function –> Function Selection –> Save to MOD –> Rawdata Selection
(e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Save)

5–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA


Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section 5-4, Saving System State Data.

Prerequisite
D One MOD (5 inches 2.3 GB)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 5 minutes

Procedures
Before beginning the software install, you will want to, save the system state data.

1. Verify that the system is powered ON. If it is not, switch ON the main switch of the OC. The system is started
up, then the main screen appears.

2. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.

3. Select Service –> Utilities –> savestate. or


Select Service –> System Tools –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate.

4. Click on Confirm.
The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

Note
The following will be saved as a system state data.
– Option key information
– Log files (log for success/failure when saving/restoring software sets)
– Scan protocol files
– IOS preferences
– Calibration files
– Autovoice files
– Next patient exam number
– User preferences
– InSite information
– Tube usage information

7. Eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

5–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-5 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM


Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section 5-5, Shutdown the System.

1. Perform either of the following:

D When selecting Service –> Utilities –> savestate in saving–state–data phases:

a. Click on Shutdown icon located on the upper left of the screen.

b. Click on OK in response to “Attention: Shutdown the system?”.

D When selecting Service –> System Tools –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate in saving–state–data
phases:

a. Click on Shutdown icon (Tool menu) located on the upper right of the screen.

Some test program runs. NO button to be displayed is clicked.

2. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.

3. Switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

5-6 DISCONNECTING THE SCSI CABLE FOR THE OPTIONAL PIONEER MOD DRIVE
(FOR V/R 3.XX OR LOWER SYSTEM ONLY)
Note
This must be required in LFC procedure if the system contains the optional Pioneer MOD drive.
For LFW procedures, skip this section 5-6, Disconnecting the SCSI cable for the Optional Pioneer
MOD Drive.

1. Withdraw the SCSI bay from the OC, where the optional MOD drive has been installed.

2. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the MOD drive.

3. Insert the SCSI bay into the OC. At this time, do NOT fix the SCSI bay using screws yet.

5–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS)


Note
For LFW procedure, skip this section 5-7, Installing System Software.

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Core OS (OS) (for V/R 3.xx or lower system)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 30 minutes

Procedures

5-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool)


1. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.
Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

2. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

3. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

4. Verify that the LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.

Note:
Repartitioning Procedures:
When the following situation happens, perform the following steps b to d. If it is not, go to step 5. (This
procedure performs repartition of the HDD to load the install program on the HDD.)

D System HDD is replaced with a new one.

D The errors occur during OS loading procedures and the system can not recover from it.

a. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

b. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

5–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) (Continued)


SGI Version x.x ARCS xxxx, xxxx
fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/ [f]ormat
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> ro <ENTER>

fx/repartition/rootdrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>


Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/ [f]ormat
fx> exi <ENTER>

c. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)

5. Click on Install System Software.

6. Click on Local CD–ROM icon.

7. Click on Install.

8. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation tools to disk” message appears. (miniroot loading phase) A few minutes later, the screen
will become in black, then “Inst Main Menu” appears.

5–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation


1. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Inst> admin <Enter>

Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)

# mount /CDROM <Enter>

# /CDROM/bin/makepart <Enter>

2. For the System with V/R 3.xx or later ONLY:


Verify that the following message are displayed.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Creating System Disk partition automatically.
.......
************************************************************************

a. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.

b. Click on Restart.
The window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button appears (shown
below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

c. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

Note
Instead of clicking on Restart, pressing ESC key twice goes to step4.

5–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


3. For the System with V/R 2.xx or lower ONLY:
Verify that the following message are displayed.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Creating System Disk partition
Diskdrive: unit1 on SCSI controller 0
Creating Rawdata Disk partition
Diskdrive: unit1 on SCSI controller 3
#
************************************************************************
a. Verify that “#” will be displayed, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

b. Switch ON the main switch of the OC again.


Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” but-
ton appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

c. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

4. Click on Install System Software.

5. Click on Local CD–ROM icon.

6. Verify that:

D The CD–ROM (Core OS) remains into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

D The LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.

7. Click on Install.

8. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation Tools to disk” message appears.

Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 9 to 11 might be skipped.

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

9. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Enter your selection and Press ENTER (c, f, r, or a) r <Enter>


(Procedure for reloading miniroot tool is started. It takes approx. 1 minutes.)

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

5–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

10. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Press Enter to invoke CShell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)

# mkfs –t xfs /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>

******************************* Displayed *******************************


meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************

# exit <Enter>

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

11. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Make new file system on /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 [yes/ne/sh/help]: yes <Enter>


Are you sure? [y/n] (n): y <Enter>
Do you want an EFS or XFS file system? [efs/xfs]: xfs <Enter>
Block size of file system 512 or 4096 bytes? 4096 <Enter>

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

12. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

Inst> admin <Enter>

Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)

# mount /CDROM <Enter>

# /CDROM/bin/makedisk <Enter>
(Procedure for system file configuration is started. It takes approx. 15 minutes.)

5–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)


13. Verify that the following message will appear.

************* Displayed (For the System with V/R 3.xx ONLY)*************


Installations and removals were successful.
Exit from the shell using ‘exit’.
************************************************************************

************* Displayed (For the System with V/R 2.xx or lower ONLY)*************
Installations and removals were successful.
done....
************************************************************************

14. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

# exit <Enter>

Admin> exit <Enter>

Inst> exit <Enter>

Automatically reconfiguring the operating system.


Ready to restart the system. Restart? xxxxx y <Enter>
(The screen will become in black.)

15. Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears. Next, “IRIS’s Internet address....” message appears (shown below).

IRIS’s Internet address is the default.


Using standalone network mode.

Note
In the next message, you might see the error message, “ALERT: SCSI hard error on (1,3). scb
0x807aeac0”. This will continues to be displayed for the system with DASM only until the configura-
tion setting is completed. However, this message can be ignored.

The system will automatically login as root.

5–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE


Note
For LFW procedure, power ON the OC main switch before starting this procedure.

Note
For installing the application revision–up (Patch) software, refer to Section 5-11. It must be installed
after completion of LFC/LFW procedure.

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Software

D For LFW ONLY:


One blank MOD (5 inches 2.3 GB or 3.5 inches 540MB, depending on the System)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 30 minutes

Procedures

5-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure)


1. Double–click on instsw icon.

“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears and the OS CD–ROM will be ejected from the
CD–ROM drive.

2. Insert the CD–ROM (application software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 30 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted,
then IRIS main menu appears again.

NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time. It MUST be removed in Section 5-10-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM and MOD.

5–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure)


1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.

2. Click on LFW located on the upper right of the screen.

3. Click on Yes in response to “Do you really want to do LFW?”

4. Set the write protect tab of the blank MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the
OC.

5. Click on Confirm.
The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

6. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.


The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.

7. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

8. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.

“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears.

9. Insert the CD–ROM (application software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 7 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.

NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time. It MUST be removed in Section 5-10-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM and MOD.

5–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-8-3 Connecting the SCSI cable for the Optional Pioneer MOD Drive
(FOR V/R 3.XX OR LOWER SYSTEM ONLY)
Note
This must be required in LFC procedure if the system contains the optional Pioneer MOD drive.
For LFW procedures, ignore this section 5-8-3, Connecting the SCSI cable for the Optional Pioneer
MOD Drive.

1. Click on Console icon located on the upper left of the screen.

2. Move the mouse in the console window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
The system automatically shuts down.

# shutdown –y –g0 <Enter>

3. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.

4. Switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

5. Withdraw the SCSI bay from the OC.

6. Connect the SCSI cable to the Pioneer MOD drive.

7. Insert the SCSI bay into the OC and fix the SCSI bay using the screws.

8. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.

9. Verify that the system is started up with no error.

5–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG)

Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 5-4 or 5-8-2)

5-9-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data


1. Double–click on Preconfig icon located at the lower right of the screen.

2. “Insert mod and press confirm!” message appears.


Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 5-4, into the MOD drive.

3. Click on Confirm.

4. Click on Continue icon a few times. The system setting screen appears.

5. Click on Accept.
The system is rebooted. It takes approx. 13 minutes.

Note
The system configuration is performed at section 5-12, Changing System Configuration (Reconfig).

5–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2 – AUXCONFIG)

Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 5-4 or 5-8-2)

Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes

5-10-1 Initiating Configuration


1. Double–click on auxconfig icon.

2. The Date entry screen appears.

D When modifying date, click on Set, then Quit.

D When proceeding to next phase, click on Quit.

The system configuration procedures are started, then automatically login as root.

5-10-2 Restoring System State Data

Procedures
1. “Restore System State data (Click on No if no saved data exists)?” appears. Click on Yes.

2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
5-4, into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.

3. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

Note
At this time, you can cancel system–state–data reloading procedure. If “Continue” is selected, this
procedure can NOT be canceled.

4. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.

5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

6. System Health Page window appears.


Select DEFAULT –> ACCEPT –> NO –> DONE on each screen.

5–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-10-3 Restoring Option Key


This procedure MUST be performed whether or not you install the new option in the system. In “Software Options”
screen, you can see any options in the installed options box, but they are NOT installed perfectly in this phase yet.
So, This Install procedure must be performed.

Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 5-4 or 5-8-2)

Procedures

For the System with V/R 2.5 or later ONLY:


The option installation procedures automatically starts. You have nothing to do! (Also see Note below.)
After completing automatic installation for option, the system shuts down, then starts up automatically. Go to Section
5-10-4, Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD.
Note
When the system contains the following options, the proper entry must be required.
D Denta Option:
“install.denta” window appears. Enter y .

Before installing the Denta Option, the Laser camera must be connected to the system. (This software
will send an image to the camera when installed.)
D ConnectPro Option:
ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the proper information. (Ask a network specialist of your head
quarter.) Then select Accept.

D Extended Raw Data Disk Option:


“All scan data has been removed” message appears. Click on OK .

5–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-10-3 Installing (or Restoring) Option Key (Continued)

For the System with V/R 2.02 or lower ONLY:


1. To remove the MOD (System state data) from the MOD drive, press the Eject button on the MOD drive.

2. Select the Option to be installed using “Available Options” box.

3. Click on Install.
The option loading is started, then the options installed are displayed at “Installed Option” box.

4. Click on Quit.

5. Click on OK.
The system is automatically rebooted.

5–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-10-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD


1. “Auto–Start Disabled” window appears. Click on OK.

2. In desktop menu, select Shell and type the following to eject the CD–ROM.

> eject <Enter>

> exit <Enter>

3. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

5–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-11 INSTALLING THE APPLICATION REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE


If the system has a revision–up (patch) software, it must be installed after completion of LFC/LFW procedure.
If it does not, skip this section 5-11, then go to section 5-12, Changing System Configuration (reconfig).

This is the common procedures for system revision–up.

Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Revision–up (Patch) Software

5-11-1 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 3.xx or Later)

NOTICE
For V/R 3.xx System with Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, 2201000–2, and 2249696–2 ONLY,
the “++DAS data for V/R 3” CD–ROM (2257080) MUST be installed first, then “SmartFilter for
V/R 3.xx” CD–ROM (2256433) MUST be installed. Loading order is important.
After installation of these software, perform the verification procedures described below to
check if they have been properly installed.

Procedure
1. Insert the CD–ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.

3. Click on Install Software (or Install Patch) located on the upper right of the screen.

4. Click on Yes to the question displayed.

5. Click on Yes again to the question displayed.


The patch installation procedures are automatically started.

6. Click on OK in response to “Installation Complete”.

7. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.

8. Type eject to eject the CD–ROM from the CD–ROM drive.

9. Type exit to terminate the shell window.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

5–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-11-1 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 3.xx or Later) (Continued)

Verification Procedures (For the system with ++DAS Data and SmartFilter Patches):
1. Insert the “++DAS data for V/R 3” CD–ROM (2257080) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC. (In this CD–ROM,
“check_patch” program are contained.)
2. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.
3. Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.
4. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts.

> /CDROM/bin/check_patch <Enter>

5. Verify that the following messages appears.


******************************* Displayed *******************************
Patch NPP30001 : HiSpeed Series Patch Software 3.01
Patch NPP30011 : ++DAS Data for V/R 3.xx
Patch NPP30013 : SmartFilter for V/R 3.xx
************************************************************************

6. Type eject to eject the CD–ROM from the CD–ROM drive.

7. Enter Exit , then press <Enter> key.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

Restoring the System State Data Again!


Note
Refer to Appendix for the reason why the system state data must be restored again.

When performing the LFC/LFW, manually restore the system state data AGAIN at this time.
Do NOT start up the system yet!
When installing the patch software only (not LFC/LFW procedures), skip this section and go to section 5-12, Changing
System Configuration (reconfig).

1. In desktop menu, select Restorestate.

2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
5-4 or 5-8-2, into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.

3. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.

Note
At this time, you can cancel system–state–data reloading procedure. If “Continue” is selected, this
procedure can NOT be canceled.

4. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.

5–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-11-1 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 3.xx or Later) (Continued)
5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.

6. Eject the MOD from the MOD drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

5-11-2 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 2.54 and 2.55)
This is the common procedures for system revision–up.

1. Insert the CD–ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.

3. Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.

4. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% su<Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> /CDROM/bin/install_patch <Enter>

5. The patch software list to be installed and message “Do you install selected patches?” appear. Click on Yes.

6. The message “Installation complete. Reboot to start using new kernel.” appears. Click on OK.

7. Enter the following to reboot the system and start using new kernel.
The system is rebooted and returns to the desktop menu.

> reboot <Enter>

8 Type eject and press <Enter> key to eject the CD–ROM from the CD–ROM drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

5–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-11-3 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 2.53 or lower)
This is the common procedures for system revision–up.

1. Insert the CD–ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.

3. Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.

4. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% su<Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> swmgr <Enter> (To run software manager.)

5. Using cursor buttons, select /CDROM/dist.

6. Click on Customize Installation button.

7. Make the check marks on the item(s) for the required patch software(s) depending on a system revision.

8. Click on Start.

9. Select File –> Exit.

10. For Version 2.00 System AND the OC with the optional Pioneer MOD drive Only:
Using an editor software (e.x. vi editor), add the following in the /etc/passwd file.

D installPMOD::0:0:Super–User:/:/usr/g/scripts/installPMOD

11 Type eject and press <Enter> key to eject the CD–ROM from the CD–ROM drive.

NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!

5–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-12 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Reconfig)


The System configuration data MUST be checked or changed when a different version of the application software
has been loaded, because new setting(s) might be added in a new version of software.

5-12-1 Configuration
1. In desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration menu appears.

When the desktop menu does not appear, click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select
System Tools –> Application Shutdown –> OK.

2. Check if the appropriate information have been set.


(If you did not have a System State MOD, you will need to enter the appropriate information.)

NOTICE
The following items restrict the use of characters for entry. Do NOT use other characters.

Items Characters Usable for Entry


Hospital Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), period (.), comma (,), and space
Machine # numerics (0–9)
Station Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), and period (.)

5–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-12 Configuration (Continued)


3. System Setting Screen:

a. Changes Hospital Name to the site’s preferred name.

b. Select the Timezone for this site, and record it below.

Time Zone

c. Verify Model Name.

d. Verify Machine # .
The unique machine number must be entered according to the table in section 5-18-4, Entering the Machine
Number.

e. Verify/change Station Name. (Entry MUST be performed using up to 4 characters.)

Note
The Model Name is currently not implemented.

f. Select Preferences to proceed to the next screen.

5–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-12 Configuration (Continued)


4. Preferences Screen:

a. Select Units for patient weight for units for patient weight to be displayed on images.

b. Select the Language for this site.

c. Select Date Format to be displayed on images.

Note
To use Japanese era for date, YY/MM/DD format must be selected.

d. Select Time Format to be displayed on screen.

e. Select Default Autovoice Language for this site.

f. For the system with V/R 2.02 or lower ONLY:

D Click on DICOM when using a DICOM device as a default archive device.

D Configure Doctors Title to the title used by the user interface.

g. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.

5–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-12 Configuration (Continued)


5. Hardware Settings Screen:

a. Configure your Camera Setup.

D Laser Camera Type : choose the closest option

D DASM Interface : this option must match your physical DASM type; for DASM–LCAM, select Digital.
For DASM–VDB, select Analog.

D Do NOT select Slides or Zoom. Use Film Composer –> Options –> Slide formats when selecting this
parameter, because the Film composer option overrides the System configuration option.

D Smooth/Sharp selects sharper or smoother image interpolation.

D Film Formats Default : choose the default film format.

b. For the system with V/R 2.02 or lower ONLY:


Select the PDU Type for this system.

5–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-12 Configuration (Continued)


c. Click on Hardware Diagnosis Information.
Type the following responses to the indicated messages:

Supported product types


a. NP
b. NPTWIN
Enter product type (press enter for default)? <Enter>

NRE Global memory sizes


a. 16Mb
b. 32Mb
c. 64Mb
Enter GM option (press enter for default)? <Enter>

Enter # of Slave DSP? xx <Enter>


Enter a twice numbers of the NPRS boards inside the OC. See table below.

Number of NPRS Entry


1 2
2 4
4 8
8 16

ÍÍÍÍÍ HiSpeed Series

ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ

NPRS
NPRM

Nest

Is this info correct (y=yes, n=no)? y <Enter>

Note
If you enter a wrong memory size, select [n] to start over the entry.

d. Select Network to proceed to the next screen.

5–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-12 Configuration (Continued)


6. Network Settings screen:

GATEWAY
HOST NAME
IP ADDRESS

IP ADDRESS

HOST NAME

CT

5–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-12 Configuration (Continued)


a. Click on Network on.
The check box becomes red.

b. OC Parameters Setting:

i. Enter Host Name.


Host Name identifies the name of this CT. This name must be unique for the site, and will appear in unix
prompts and in a few other places. If you set up a network connection to the site, the OC computer will
appear on the site’s network as <Host Name>.

ii. Enter IP Address.


The IP address is administrated by a network administrator. Ask a network administrator to assign an IP
address.

iii. Enter Net Mask.(if required.)


The Net Mask is to divide the IP address between the network bits and the host bits. The Net Mask is
determined by a network administrator.

c. If this system is not connected to a “Site Subnet” then;

D Verify all other fields are set to the defaults:

OC – Net Mask Gateway – Host Name Gateway – IP Address


255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254

D You should now skip to step 7.

d. If this system is connected to a “Site Subnet” then continue as follows;


Gateway Parameters Setting:

i. Enter the Gateway Parameters (Host Name and IP Address). If possible consult the site’s network ad-
ministrator before configuring the interface to the site’s network. The site administrator should provide
the Gateway IP Address.

7. InSite Setting Screen:

a. Click on InSite.
After a moment, the InSite Proprietary Screen appears.

8. Click on Accept after completing the configuration.


The system is rebooted and returns to the desktop menu.

9. “Auto–Start Disabled” message appears. Click on OK.

5–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-13 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM


1. In desktop menu, select Startup.
After the power–on test, the system will automatically start up.

2. For the system with V/R 2.02 or lower ONLY:


Click on Continue in time setting window.

3. Verify that the system starts up with no error.

4. Confirm that the latest version of software has been installed in the system. The system version is displayed
at the lower right of the screen while the system is starting up.

5. Click on OK in Attention window.

5–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-14 COMPLETING THE LFC/LFW PROCEDURE


1. Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Archive –> Restore
–> Selection –> All examination –> Restore –> Restore examination –> OK)
After restoring image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.

2. Restore the raw data to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Scan –> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata
Function –> Function Selection –> Restore/Delete from MOD –> (Select all rawdata using shift key.) –>
Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Restore)

5–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-15 SETTING CRT GAMMA VALUE


The gamma value for CRT display must be set after system software installation.

1. Click on Service icon located on the upper left screen.

2. Click on System Tools –> Unix Shell.

3. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% su<Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> gamma 1 <Enter> (To modify gamma value to 1.0.)
(Note: One space input is required between inputs of “gamma”
and “1”.)
> gamma <Enter> (To verify that gamma value should be 1.000000.)

> exit <Enter> (To terminate the shell window.)

> exit <Enter> (To close Unix shell.)

5–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-16 SELECTING AUTO VOICE LANGUAGE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 2.02 OR LOWER ONLY)
This is the procedures for the system with Version 2.02 or lower.
For the system of Version 2.5 or later, See Operator’s manual (Protocol Management –> Auto Voice).
Auto voice language can be selected from eight languages by a field engineer. English–male for 1st language (Auto
Voice #1–#3) and Japanese for 2nd language (Auto Voice #4–#6) are automatically selected as a default after LFC.
1. To display the desktop menu:
a. Click on Shutdown icon located on the upper left of the screen.
b. Click on OK in response to “Attention: Shut down the system.”.
“Okay to power off......” message appears.
c. Switch OFF the main switch of the OC.
d. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.
Few seconds later, in the black screen, “Please wait...System is being started.” message appears.
e. Press [Shift] + [7] to display the desktop menu.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Shell button located on the upper right of the screen.
The shell window appears.
3. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

% selectAVLang <Enter>
Change default language for Auto Voice

Select language set (1/2)? 2 <Enter>


This is for example. To select 1st language, enter “1”.

Select preferred languages (enf/enm/fr/ge/it/sp/ms/jp) ? fr


<Enter>
This is for example to select French.
enf : English–female
enm : English–male
fr : French
ge : German
it : Italian
sp : Spanish
ms : Mexican Spanish
jp : Japanese

Language Set : 2, Selected Language : French

Accept to change (Y/N) ? y <Enter>


When no modification is required, select “y” (Yes).

***selectAVLang has finished. Application should be restarted to take


effect.

> exit <Enter> (To terminate the shell window.)

4. On the desktop menu, click on Startup button located on the upper right of the screen to run the application.

5–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-17 DISPLAYING JAPANESE MESSAGE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 1.20 ONLY)
For the Japanese system with System Version 1.20 only, the following procedure must be performed to display the
messages (in the lower right side of the scan screen) in Japanese.

This procedure can be skipped for the system with System Version 2.00 or later.

1. Click on Service icon located on the upper left screen.

2. Click on Shell in the System tools.

3. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

> /usr/g/srtools/setJapMes <Enter>

Note
“J” and “M” must be entered as a capital letter.

> exit <Enter> (To terminate the shell window.)

5–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-18 APPENDIX

NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!

5-18-1 How to format a System HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY)
1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.
2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.
Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

3. Press ESC key.


Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.
4. Cick on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.
5. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
6. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version 6.3 ARCS Nov 26, 1996


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/ [f]ormat
fx> f <ENTER>

fx/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current) <ENTER>


.........
..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>
Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 30 minutes to format a 2GB HDD.

5–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-18-1 How to format a System HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY) (Continued)
7. Verify that “format completed successfully” message appears.

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/ [f]ormat
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> ro <ENTER>

fx/repartition/rootdrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>


Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

8. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)

9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot. (Proceed to Section 5-7-1, Loading Miniroot (Installation
tool).)

5–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-18-2 How to format an Image HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY)
1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.

2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.


Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).

Starting up the system


Stop for maintenance

3. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.

4. Cick on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

5. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

6. Type the following responses.

> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>


.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>

SGI Version 6.3 ARCS Nov 26, 1996


fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) 2 <ENTER>

fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/ [f]ormat
fx> f <ENTER>

fx/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current) <ENTER>


.........
..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 2, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>

Fomenting procedure is started. It will take approximately 30 minutes to format a 2GB HDD.

5–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-18-2 How to format an Image HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY) (Continued)
7. Verify that “format completed successfully” message appears.

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/ [f]ormat
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> o <ENTER>

fx/repartition/optiondrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>


Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––


[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

8. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)

9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot to perform LFC. (Proceed to Section 5-7-1, Loading Mini-
root (Installation tool).)

5–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-18-3 The Reason Why the System State Data Must be Reloaded TWICE
For the system state data, the following principle exists:
The version of the system state data to be restored must be same as or higher than its version to be saved.

The figure below is an example of performing the LFC/LFW for the V/R 3.02 system. The V/R 3.02 system state data
is saved before LFC/LFW. The system state data is automatically reloaded after installing application software, but
this violates the principle described above because of the system V/R 3.00, not 3.02. So, after installing a patch soft-
ware to upgrade the system version to V/R 3.02, the system state data should be manually reloaded again.

For this reason, when performing LFC/LFW and patch software installation, the system state data must be reloaded
twice.

Up to now, a problem does NOT occur even if this principle is NOT strictly followed. However, when upgrading the
system to V/R 4.11, 4.01, 3.02, or 2.55 (Y2K FMI), this principle is required. If it is not followed, a part of the system
state data to be reloaded are destroyed.

NG: Lower OK: Same


Version Version
(3.00) (3.02)

System
3.02 3.00 3.02
Version

Installing
Procedures LFC/LFW Patch
Softwares
Automatically

Manually

System
Save Restore Restore
State
Data (V/R 3.02 (V/R 3.02 (V/R 3.02
system system system
state data) state data) state data)

5–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-18-4 Entering the Machine Number


Enter Machine #, complying with the instructions below.

1. Write down the System serial No. printed on the label on the rear left of the PDU.
If a customer’s PDU does NOT have such a label, the label might exist into the accessory box which has been
shipped with the system.

System Serial Number

2. Determine Machine # in accordance with the table below and enter it into Machine # in the system setting screen.
For the example above, “47084” must be entered as a Machine #.

Products System Serial Number Machine #


(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)

CT HiSpeed NPZAYxxxCT 48xxx


LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPZBYxxxCT 47xxx
NPZCYxxxCT 46xxx
NPZDYxxxCT 45xxx
NPLAYxxxCT 44xxx
NPLBYxxxCT 43xxx
NPLCYxxxCT 42xxx
NPLDYxxxCT 41xxx
(Continued)

5–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-18-4 Entering Machine Number (Continued)

Products System Serial Number Machine #


(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)

CT HiSpeed NPLEYxxxCT 40xxx


LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPLFYxxxCT 39xxx
NPLGYxxxCT 38xxx
NPFAYxxxCT 37xxx
NPFBYxxxCT 36xxx
NPFCYxxxCT 35xxx
NPFDYxxxCT 34xxx
NPFEYxxxCT 33xxx
NPFGYxxxCT 32xxx
NPFFYxxxCT 31xxx
NPDAYxxxCT 30xxx
NPDBYxxxCT 29xxx
NPDCYxxxCT 28xxx
NPDDYxxxCT 27xxx
NPDEYxxxCT 26xxx
NPDGYxxxCT 25xxx
NPDFYxxxCT 24xxx
NPMCYxxxCT 23xxx
NPMDYxxxCT 22xxx
NPMEYxxxCT 21xxx
XJNPYxxxCT 20xxx
ACTAYxxxCT 19xxx
XJNTYxxxCT 18xxx
NPPJYxxxCT 17xxx
NPPLYxxxCT 16xxx
NPPNYxxxCT 15xxx
NPPUYxxxCT 14xxx
(Continued)

5–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

5-18-4 Entering Machine Number (Continued)

Products System Serial Number Machine #


(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)

CT HiSpeed NPPPYxxxCT 13xxx


LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPPSYxxxCT 12xxx
NPPVYxxxCT 11xxx
NPPTYxxxCT 10xxx
NPNSYxxxCT 09xxx
NPNTYxxxCT 08xxx
NPNUYxxxCT 07xxx
NPNXYxxxCT 06xxx
NPMAYxxxCT 05xxx
NPMBYxxxCT 04xxx
NPPAYxxxCT 03xxx
NPPEYxxxCT 02xxx
NPNMYxxxCT 01xxx
CT HiSpeed NX/i, NX/iPro NPTAYxxxCT 04xxx
NPTBYxxxCT 03xxx
NPTCYxxxCT 02xxx
NPTDYxxxCT 01xxx

5–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

SECTION 6 – X–RAY ALIGNMENT

6-1 GENERAL
This ‘X–ray Alignment’ consists of the following check/adjustment procedures and must be performed in this order.

Order X–Ray Alignment Description


↓ Item
Twin Detector System Single Detector System
1 Detector Position For Twin System Only: –
Alignment Adjusts parallelism and detector Z–
axis position to Gantry bearing sur-
face.
2 Aperture Position For Twin System Only: –
Alignment Adjusts the aperture parallelism and
distance between the aperture and
Gantry bearing surface.
3 Plane Of Rotation Filmless POR: The tube warm–up Film POR: The tube position in Z–axis
(POR) scans are automatically performed direction is adjusted using a film. The
until the case temperature becomes Tube warm–up scans are NOT per-
30% (For Twin System Only), then formed.
the tube position in Z–axis direction is
adjusted. The tube travel is calcu-
lated from the count ratio A/(A+B) of
150 channels (R50ch, C50ch, and
L50ch).
4 Detector Beam– Filmless BOW: The tube warm–up Film BOW: The Detector position in
On–Window scans are automatically performed Z–axis direction is adjusted using a
(BOW) until the case temperature becomes film. The Tube warm–up scans are
30% (For Twin System Only), then NOT performed
the Detector position in Z–axis direc-
tion is adjusted. The tube travel is
calculated from the count ratio
A/(A+B) of 150 channels (R50ch,
C50ch, and L50ch).
5 Qcal Channel Ratio For Twin System Only: –
Compensates sensitivity between A
and B slices for Z–axis beam tracking.
– Gravity SAG (G– Check procedure for the Gantry rotating mechanism (bend, vibrations, etc.)
SAG)
6 ISO Center Align- Aligns the X–ray tube focus to the FOV center and the Detector center chan-
ment nel.
7 Filter Center Align- Aligns the filter to the X–ray tube and the Detector.
ment

6–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-1 GENERAL (continued)

Note1: G–SAG is performed if considered necessary.


Note2: If you are sure that some procedures do not have to be performed, in this case, the possible allowed
procedure combination/order should be:

At site installation or X–ray tube replacement, perform 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7.


At detector replacement, perform 4 → 5 → 6 → 7.
Note3: Z–axis mis–alignment has serious effect on an image quality for the Twin Detector system, as
compared to the single detector system. Therefore, the Detector position alignment, aperture position
alignment, and tube warm–up sequence at POR and BOW must be properly performed.

6–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-1 GENERAL (continued)

Difference of POR Between Twin Detector and Single Detector


For POR of the Twin Detector system, the X–ray beam location after adjustment is determined by the initial position
of the Aperture and Detector (the center between A and B slices).
Therefore, the X–ray beam location adjusted by Film–less POR might be different from one by Film POR, but it is
no problem due to the fact that:

D A slight tilt of X–ray beam against Z–axis has little effect on an image quality.

D The Aperture and Detector are installed using the special tools shipped with the system to ensure reliable
position and parallelism. (The single Detector does NOT require the aperture alignment tool.)

D During Filmless POR, the X–ray tube temperature is controlled by software so that the X–ray beam can
be exposed at a certain location of the detector. (The single Detector does NOT control the X–ray tube
temperature.)

X–Ray Tube

Focus

ÈÈ Using special tools, adjust

ÈÈ Collimator the Aperture and Detector so

ÈÈ
that they are parallel to the
Gantry bearing.

ÈÈ
ÈÈ Aperture
Top View

ÈÈ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÈÈ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Gantry

ÈÈ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Bearing

ÈÈ
Gantry

ÈÈ
Bearing

ÈÈ
Aperture or Detector

ÈÈ
ÈÈ
X–ray Beam adjusted by Film POR Z–Axis

ÈÈ X–ray Beam adjusted by Film–less POR

ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
B A

ÈÈ
Detector

ÈÈ Z–Axis

6–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-1 GENERAL (continued)

WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD !
IN THIS ‘X–RAY ALIGNMENT’, GANTRY COMPONENTS ARE ADJUSTED AND SCANS ARE
PERFORMED. ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ SWITCH BEFORE SERVICING OR
ADJUSTING THE GANTRY. ALSO VERIFY THAT NO PEOPLE ARE IN THE SCAN ROOM
WHENEVER A SCAN IS PERFORMED.

Requirements
The critical components for X–ray Alignment are all mounted directly to the rotating Gantry; they are:

D X–ray tube

D Collimator (includes a bow–tie filter and an adjustable beam slit)

D Detector

Tools and materials required for x–ray alignment:

D Except for Twin System

– Polaroid film packs

– Polaroid film holder (developer for Polaroid film)

– Film holder (2204748 X 2) for Detector Beam–on–window alignment

D For Twin System

– Detector alignment tool (shipped with the system)

– Aperture alignment tool (shipped with the system)

D G–SAG pin (attached on the bottom of the collimator)

6–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-1 GENERAL (continued)

Gantry Geometry
Gantry geometrical direction definitions:

THETA THETA

(–) (+) (–) (+)


D Theta – Tangent to Gantry rotation.
clockwise (+)
counterclockwise (–).

Adjustment possible for:


X–ray Tube
Collimator
Detector Zero degrees 6 o’clock
(HOME)

D Z–Axis – Parallel to the axis of Gantry rotation.


(+)
toward the Table (–)
away from the Table (+).
(–)

Adjustment possible for:


X–ray Tube
Detector

Polaroid Film Use (POR and BOW except for Twin system only)
Use a Polaroid film pack, a Polaroid film holder or squeeze roller for development as follows:

1. Develop a Polaroid film pack with the film holder.

2. Break the chemical pod over a table edge, or use a squeeze roller as follows:

a. Apply heavy pressure to break the pod.

b. Ease up slightly to spread the developer evenly over the film.

6–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY)


This procedure keeps constant the distance between the Z–axis adjusting nut (left, center, and right) for the Detector
and Detector support plate so that the Detector can be installed parallel and at a predefine distance (8.9mm) with the
Gantry bearing surface.

Special Equipment
D Detector Alignment Tool (Shipped with the system)

1. Preparation:

a. Set the Gantry to the 0_ tilt position.

b. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.

c. Remove the front, rear, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.

2. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board.

3. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS Assy reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.

4. Switch OFF the service switch on the SUB board.

6–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-2 Detector Position Alignment (For Twin System Only) (Continued)


5. Loosen the three Detector locking screws. (Do NOT remove them.)

Illustration 6–1 Detector Locking Screws

Locking Screw
Z–Axis
Adjustment Nut

Detector

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËË
Detector
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËË
Support Plate

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËË Locking Screw

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËË (Allen Head)

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËË
Z–Axis

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËË
Adjustment Nut

ËËËËËËËËËËËË

Detector
Support Plate
Detector

6–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-2 Detector Position Alignment (For Twin System Only) (Continued)


6. Using the Detector Adjustment Tool, set the distance between the Z–axis adjustment nut and detector support
plate to the so that it is the same one as the thickness of the tool.

Illustration 6–2 Detector Alignment Tool

Z–Axis
Adjustment
Nut
Alignment

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Tool

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Alignment
Tool

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Z–Axis
Adjustment
Nut

7. Tighten the three detector locking screws securely.

8. Proceed to Section 6-3, ‘Aperture Position Alignment’.

6–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY)


This procedure keeps constant the distance and parallelism between the aperture and Gantry bearing surface.

Special Equipment
D Aperture Alignment Tool (Shipped with the system)

1. Preparation:

a. Set the Gantry to the 0_ tilt position.

b. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.

c. Remove the front, rear, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.

2. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board.

3. Rotate the Gantry until the Aperture Assy reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.

4. Switch OFF the service switch on the SUB board.

6–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-3 Aperture Position Alignment (For Twin System Only)


5. Set the collimator to the initial position.

a. Switch ON all switches at the rear Gantry base.

b. Select Service –> Offline Scan –> T/G Control.

c. Set Collimator Control:


Auto Collimator: OFF, Position Change: ON, Move mode: Rel., Reset: ON

d. Click on OK. Verify that the aperture stepping motor rotates.

6–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-3 Aperture Position Alignment (For Twin System Only)


6. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.

7. Remove the two nuts and rear lead (Pb) plate from the aperture Assy.

Nuts

Rear Lead Plate

6–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-3 Aperture Position Alignment (For Twin System Only)


8. Loosen the following nuts and screws of the aperture Assy. (Do NOT remove them.)

Nuts

Screws (3 pieces)

6–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-3 Aperture Position Alignment (For Twin System Only)


9. Set the Aperture alignment tool in between the Gantry bearing and aperture Assy.

10. While pressing the Aperture Assy against the aperture alignment tool, tighten the aperture nuts and screws grad-
ually in the order shown in the photograph below.

11. Remove the Aperture alignment tool.

Aperture Alignment Tool

2 7
PUSH 6

5 4

6–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-3 Aperture Position Alignment (For Twin System Only)


12. Reinstall the rear lead (Pb) plate onto the Aperture Assy with the lead side facing to the front. Tighten the two
plate mounting nuts . (Torque: 37 kgf.cm)

Rear Lead Plate

Lead Side

13. Proceed to Section 6-4-2, ‘POR for Twin System’.

6–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4 PLANE OF ROTATION


This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the x–ray fan beam until it is perpendicular to the axis of
Gantry rotation within 0.5 mm, for Small Focus, and 0.75 mm, for Large Focus.

6-4-1 POR Except for Twin system


Note
For POR for Twin system, refer to 6-4-2 POR for Twin System.

1. Preparation:

a. Rotate the Gantry to the home position.

b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

c. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers. (The rear cover should remain installed to attach a
Polaroid film onto it later)

d. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)

2. Place a Polaroid film at the Gantry 180 deg. position:

Place a Polaroid film within the scan circle as follows:

a. Mark a ‘T’ on the film to identify the Table side. See Illustration 6–4.

b. Attach the film on the bottom ring of the Gantry rear cover using adhesive tape. And put a lead plate on the
film. See Illustration 6–3. (If a lead plate is not available, use a piece of solder)

Illustration 6–3 Placing a Polaroid Film

X–Ray
Tube

Gantry Rear Cover

Table

Lead Plate

Attach Polaroid Film


Detector using Adhesive Tape

6–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-1 POR Except for Twin System (Continued)


3. Scan a Polaroid film with Small Focus:

Perform two off–line stationary scans; one with 0 deg, the other with 180 deg.

a. Select Service –> Off–Line Scan from the Data Analysis menu.

b. Perform the following stationary scans:

Scan 1 Scan 2
AZIMUTH : 0 deg AZIMUTH : 180 deg
SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec
THICKNESS : 1 mm THICKNESS : 1 mm
FOCUS : SMALL FOCUS : SMALL
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
(Others) : (defaults) (Others) : (defaults)

c. Remove the film pack.

d. Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.

6–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-1 POR Except for Twin System (Continued)


4. Check if the narrow exposure lies within the wider exposure, and the center lines of the two beams coincide within
0.5 mm (see illustration 6–4):

XF–XR
2 ≤ 0.5 mm –––> proceed to step 6.

XF–XR
2 > 0.5 mm –––> proceed to the next step 5.

Where XF: the front width not covered by the narrow beam
XR: the rear width not covered by the narrow beam

Illustration 6–4 Narrow and Wide Exposure

XR
TABLE GANTRY
XF

Measure XF–XR
2

Narrow Beam
(Tube at 180 deg. THETA) Wide Beam
(Tube at 0 deg. THETA)

6–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-1 POR Except for Twin System (Continued)


5. Adjust the tube Z–Axis position:

a. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.

b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “XG Power” switches.

c. Install the Dial Indicator onto the cable duct, using the Dial Indicator Attachment Tool. See illustration 6–5.

Illustration 6–5 Dial Indicator Attachment

For System with D3142T Tube

Dial Indicator

Dial Indicator Attachment Tool

For System with D3152T Tube

Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator Attachment Tool

6–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-1 POR Except for Twin System (Continued)


d. For System with D3142T Tube:

i. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts. See Illustration 6–6.

ii. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z–Axis; note that there are two Z–Axis nuts for adjustment.

iii. Loosen the nut that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.

iv. Adjust the x–ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

See illustration 6–4; in this example, the tube should be shifted axially toward the Table to center the wide
beam over the narrow beam.

v. Tighten the nut previously loosened in step iii.

vi. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts. (Torque: 280 kg–cm)

vii. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.

viii. Return to step 2.

Illustration 6–6 X–ray Tube Positioning (For System with D3142T Tube)

Mounting Bolts
Adjustment
Nut for THETA

Adjustment
Nut for Z–Axis

Mounting Bolts

6–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-1 POR Except for Twin System (Continued)


For System with D3152T Tube:

i. Loosen the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts.

ii. Adjust the x–ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

clockwise ;toward the Table(–)


counterclockwise ;away from the Table(+)

See illustration 6–4; in this example, the tube should be shifted axially toward the Table to center the wide
beam over the narrow beam.

iii. Tighten the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts. (Torque: 280 kg–cm)

iv. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.

v. Return to step 2.

Illustration 6–7 X–ray Tube Positioning (For System with D3152T Tube)

Mounting Bolts

Support Bolt

Mounting Bolts

Adjustment
Adjustment Nut for Z–Axis
Bolt for THETA

6–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-1 POR Except for Twin System (Continued)

Plane of Rotation with Large Focus


6. Perform steps 2 and 3, but this time, with Large Focus.

7. Check if the narrow exposure lies within the wider exposure, and the center lines of the two beams coincide within
0.75 mm:

See Illustration 6–4.

XF–XR
2 ≤ 0.75 mm –––> proceed to step 8.

XF–XR
2 > 0.75 mm –––> adjust the tube position per step 5, and then go to step 6.

8. Proceed to Section 6-5, ‘Detector Beam–on–Window.’

6–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-2 POR for Twin System


The Filmless POR is performed for the Twin system.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
Do not remove the bow–tie filter during POR for the Twin System.

1. Preparation:

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers.

2. Select Service –> Automated Alignment –> POR Alignment.

3. Click on OK to enter the POR program.

4. Click on Confirm to enter warm up scan sequence.

5. Click on Confirm in the Service Scan Window.


The warm up scans start, then air scans automatically start.

6. The tube travel appears on the screen. If the following message appears, you can complete the POR proce-
dures.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Tube is Aligned within tolerance.
For Accuracy
Move Tube x.xxx mm (x.xxxx inch) FWD.
************************************************************************

6–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-2 POR for Twin System (Continued)


7. Adjust the tube Z–Axis position:

a. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.

b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “XG Power” switches.

c. Install the Dial Indicator onto the cable duct, using the Dial Indicator Attachment Tool. See illustration 6–8.

Illustration 6–8 Dial Indicator Attachment

For System with D3142T Tube

Dial Indicator

Dial Indicator Attachment Tool

For System with D3152T Tube

Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator Attachment Tool

6–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-2 POR for Twin System (Continued)


d. For System with D3142T Tube:

i. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts. See Illustration 6–9.

ii. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z–Axis; note that there are two Z–Axis nuts for adjustment.

iii. Loosen the nut that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.

iv. Adjust the x–ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

Formula: x.xxxx mm / 0.75 = 1/xx turn of adjustment nut


Counterclockwise ;FWD, toward the Table
Clockwise ;BWD, away from the Table

Specification : less than 0.156 mm

v. Tighten the nut previously loosened in step iii.

vi. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts. (Torque: 280 kg–cm)

vii. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.

viii. Return to step 2.

Illustration 6–9 X–ray Tube Positioning (For System with D3142T Tube)

Mounting Bolts
Adjustment
Nut for THETA

Adjustment
Nut for Z–Axis

Mounting Bolts

6–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-4-2 POR for Twin System (Continued)


For System with D3152T Tube:

i. Loosen the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts.

ii. Adjust the x–ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

Formula: x.xxxx mm / 0.75 = 1/xx turn of adjustment nut


Clockwise ;FWD, toward the Table
Counterclockwise ;BWD, away from the Table

Specification : less than 0.156 mm

iii. Tighten the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts. (Torque: 280 kg–cm)

iv. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.

v. Return to step 2.

Illustration 6–10 X–ray Tube Positioning (For System with D3152T Tube)

Mounting Bolts

Support Bolt

Mounting Bolts

Adjustment
Adjustment Nut for Z–Axis
Bolt for THETA

6–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-5 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW

6-5-1 BOW Except for Twin System


Note
For BOW for Twin System, refer to 6-5-2 BOW for Twin System.

To ensure that the entire width of the x–ray beam falls within the Detector window, follow this procedure for a Z–Axis
position check/adjustment of the Detector.

1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Plane of Rotation’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the Gantry front, rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)

d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

2. For System with D3142T Tube:


Check that the x–ray tube case is at 20 % or higher heat level:

If not, perform the following multi scan:

SCAN TIME : 3.0 sec


THICKNESS : 5 mm
KV : 80 kV
MA : 200 mA
INTERVAL : 0 mm
VOICE : OFF
SLICE: : 30

After the above scans are completed, the Gantry will not halt at the home position; push the reset switch on the
TGP Board to position the Gantry to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 0’clock position).

6–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-5-1 BOW Except for Twin System (Continued)


3. Scan Polaroid films inserted into the film holders:

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Insert a Polaroid film to the three film holders with the side marked “THIS SIDE TOWARD LENS” facing down
and the “INSERT THIS END” toward the Gantry when placed on the Detector. Make sure that the films are
fully inserted into the holders, otherwise you may lose part of the image. See Illustration 6–11.

Film Holders
Since the Z–Axis position of the Detector is adjusted on three locations (right, left, and center of the Detector),
three film holders are provided: two for the right and left ends of the Detector, and one for center.

c. Mount the three film holders with film onto the right and left ends and the center, of the Detector. When instal-
ling the center film holder, push it toward the Gantry until its center tab touches the center mounting support of
the Detector. See Illustrations 6–11.

d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.

Illustration 6–11 Film Holder Placement

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Film
ÁÁÁÁÁ Film

Film

6–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-5-1 BOW Except for Twin System (Continued)


4. Ensure that the x–ray tube case is the following heat level, and then, perform a stationary scan on the films:
For System with D3142T Tube: 20% or higher heat level
For System with D3152T Tube: 10% or lower heat level

a. Select Service –> Off–Line Scan from the Data Analysis menu.

b. In this menu, perform the following stationary scan:

AZIMUTH : 0 deg
SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec
THICKNESS : 7 mm
FOCUS : Large
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA

c. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

d. Remove the film holders.

e. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

f. Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.

g. Mark ‘Left’, ‘Right’, or ‘Center’ and ‘Table’ or ‘Gantry’ on the film as appropriate.

5. Examine the films for axial centering of the x–ray beam to the center line of the Detector window:

See Illustration 6–12. You should see both the top and bottom edges of x–ray. The edges should be well defined.

Illustration 6–12 Beam–on–Window Exposure


HC
H8

H1
Xw

Xw
Xc

LEFT CENTER RIGHT

Measure if the x–ray beam centering falls within the following values:

XW – H1 XW – H8 H1 – H8 XC – HC
2 < 1 mm 2 < 1 mm < 1 mm 2 < 1 mm

If these are not met, perform step 6.

If these are met, proceed to step 7.

6–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-5-1 BOW Except for Twin System (Continued)


6. Adjust the Detector Z–Axis position:

a. Check that the Gantry is at the home position.

b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

c. Remove the flexible cable cover. See Illustration 6–13.

d. Loosen the three locking screws (Allen cap head).

Illustration 6–13 Beam–on–Window Adjustment

Locking Screw
Z–Axis (Allen Head)
Flexible Cable Cover Detector

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Adjustment Nut

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Z–Axis
Adjustment Nut

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Detector
Support Plate Detector
Pin

Detector Detector
Support Plate

6–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-5-1 BOW Except for Twin System (Continued)


e. Turn Z–Axis adjustment nut to shift the Detector along the Z–Axis according to below:
CW: away from the Table
CCW: toward the Table
One Turn: approximately 0.75mm shift.
Distance to be shifted: Distance measured in step 5, i.e.;

XW – H1
2 for right side
XW – H8
2 for left side
XC – HC
2 for center

f. Tighten the three locking screws.

g. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

h. Return to step 2.

7. Proceed to ‘Gravity SAG’, or Section 6-8, ‘Iso Center Alignment.’

6–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-5-2 BOW for Twin System


To ensure that the entire width of the x–ray beam falls within the Detector window, follow this procedure for a Z–Axis
position check/adjustment of the Detector.

For Detector Z–axis alignment of TWIN system, high accuracy is required for geometric position between X–ray beam
and detector. Detector is aligned so that each detector channel (A–ch and B–ch) counts becoming same.

This Filmless Detector Z axis alignment require a scan to the user, and calculates ratio of counts between A side and B
side on 3 area, (left, center, right). The ratio is converted to tolerance of detector (mm) and displayed. The user move
detector and retry BOW.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
Do not remove the bow–tie filter during BOW for the Twin System.

1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Plane of Rotation’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the Gantry front, rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.

c. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

2. Select Service –> Automated Alignment –> BOW alignment.

3. Click on OK to enter the BOW program.

4. Click on Confirm to enter warm up scan sequence.

5. Click on Confirm in the Service Scan Window.


The warm up scans start, then air scans automatically start.

6. The detector travel appears on the screen. If the following message appears, you can complete the BOW proce-
dures.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Detector is Aligned within tolerance.
************************************************************************

7. Adjust the Detector Z–Axis position:

a. Check that the Gantry is at the home position.

b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

c. Remove the flexible cable cover. See Illustration 6–14.

d. Loosen the three locking screws (Allen cap head).

6–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-5-2 BOW for Twin System (Continued)

Illustration 6–14 Beam–on–Window Adjustment

Locking Screw
Z–Axis (Allen Head)

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Flexible Cable Cover Detector Adjustment Nut

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË Z–Axis
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)

ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
Adjustment Nut Detector
Support Plate Detector
Pin

Detector Detector
Support Plate

e. Adjust the Detector position by turning the adjustment nut(s) by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

Formula: x.xxxx mm / 0.75 = 1/xx turn of adjustment nut


Counterclockwise ;FWD, toward the Table
Clockwise ;BWD, away from the Table

Specification : Detector Left, less than 0.072 mm


Detector Center, less than 0.076 mm
Detector Right, less than 0.072 mm

f. Tighten the three locking screws.

g. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

h. Return to step 2.

8. Proceed to ‘Qcal Channel Ratio’ .

6–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-6 QCAL CHANNEL RATIO (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY)


This calibration must be performed just after completion of Filmless BOW.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
Do not remove the bow–tie filter during Q–cal Channel Ratio.

1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the BOW procedure.

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the Gantry front, rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.

c. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

2. Select Service –> Automated Alignment –> Qcal Channel Ratio.

3. Click on OK to enter the Qcal channel ratio program.

4. Click on Confirm in the Service Scan Window.


The scans start, then calibration automatically starts.

6–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-7 GRAVITY SAG


For the system with V/R 4.00 or later, Gravity Sag menu is added to the Service menu. This is a semi–automated
tool to shorten the calculation time.

6-7-1 G–SAG For HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i, and NX/i Pro


Note
For NX/i, the system software must be at V/R 5.52 or later. For the NX/i system with V/R 5.51 or
lower, perform the following G–SAG procedure for DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i. For NX/i Pro and ZX/i, this
procedure can be performed independently of software version.

1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)

d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

2. Select Gravity Sag, refer to below:

Service → Gravity sag

3. Within the ‘Gravity sag’ menu, click on Confirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform air scans automati-
cally.

4. After completing air scans, install the G–SAG pin:

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.

c. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction until the x–ray tube is positioned at the bottom.

d. Set the Service switch to OFF.

e. Move the G–SAG pin into the position shown in Illustration 6–15.

f. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

Illustration 6–15 Installing G–SAG Pin

(Original Position) (Moved)

SAG Pin

BOTTOM VIEW OF THE COLLIMATOR

6–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-7-1 G–SAG For HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i, and NX/i Pro (Continued)
5. Click on Confirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform G–SAG PIN scans automatically.
G–SAG calculation is automatically performed and its result is displayed.
Verify that the following is displayed.

Gravity sag is in tolerance

6. If the gravity SAG data is out of specifications, verify that the detector mounting bolts and x–ray tube mounting
bolts are correctly torqued, and then perform this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure again.

7. Replace the G–SAG pin:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.

b. Replace the G–SAG pin to the original position. See illustration 6–15.

c. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.

8. Proceed to Section 6-8, ‘Iso Center Alignment’ if you performed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ procedure
prior to this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure; or you do not perform ‘Iso Center Alignment’ or ‘Filter Center Alignment’
(Section 6-9), perform the following:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.

b. Installed the bow–tie filter.

6-7-2 G–SAG For HiSpeed DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i


1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)

d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

2. Select Tube ISO Alignment, refer to below:

Service → Automated Alignment → Tube ISO Alignment

3. Within the ‘Tube ISO Alignment’ menu, perform the air scan, following the instructions displayed on the CRT
screen.

6–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-7-2 G–SAG For HiSpeed DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i (Continued)


4. Install the G–SAG pin:

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.

c. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction until the x–ray tube is positioned at the bottom.

d. Set the Service switch to OFF.

e. Move the G–SAG pin into the position shown in Illustration 6–16.

f. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

Illustration 6–16 Installing G–SAG Pin

(Original Position) (Moved)

SAG Pin

BOTTOM VIEW OF THE COLLIMATOR

5. Perform the G–SAG pin scan, instead of the usual pin scan performed during ‘Tube ISO Alignment’, following
the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.

6. Observe the calculated MEAN file (gravity SAG data) using View Vector:

a. Select View Vector; refer to below:

Service → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis →


View Vector

b. Select the vector file.

c. Click on [Plot].

d. Select ‘Auto Scale’, or, if appropriate, select ‘Manual Scale.’

e. Check the followings:

SAG.L : 0.45 or less

SAG.H : 0.4 or less (for Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, 2201000–2, 2249696–2)


0.2 or less (Others)

See Illustration 6–17.

6–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-7-2 G–SAG For HiSpeed DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i (Continued)

Illustration 6–17 Gravity SAG Curve

SAG. H

SAG. L

7. Replace the G–SAG pin:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.

b. Replace the G–SAG pin to the original position. See illustration 6–16.

c. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.

8. If the gravity SAG data is out of specifications, verify that the detector mounting bolts and x–ray tube mounting
bolts are correctly torqued, and then perform this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure again.

9. Proceed to Section 6-8, ‘Iso Center Alignment’ if you performed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ procedure
prior to this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure; or you do not perform ‘Iso Center Alignment’ or ‘Filter Center Alignment’
(Section 6-9), perform the following:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.

b. Installed the bow–tie filter.

6–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT


This ‘ISO Center Alignment’ aligns the x–ray tube focus to the FOV center and the Detector center channel.

Illustration 6–18 ISO Center Adjustment

Adjust

X–ray
Tube
Focus

Center of FOV

CH1
Detector

Center Channel:
396.75 ± 0.02 CH

Note
Within the ‘Automated Alignment’ menu (Service → Automated Alignment), you don not have to per-
form the following menus:
‘Tube Rough ISO Alignment’
‘Radial Alignment’
These are performed at the GEYMS factory only.

1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ or ‘Gravity
SAG’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)

d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.

6–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)


2. Select Tube ISO Alignment, refer to below:

Service → Automated Alignment → Tube ISO Alignment

Perform air and pin scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.

Note
Attach a steel pin, approximately 6 mm in diameter, (ex. drill bit or phillips screw driver) to the
phantom holder at a position approximately 5 cm away from the scan axis center, as shown in
Illustration 6–19.

Illustration 6–19 Pin Scan

Center of
Scan Plane

Approx. 5cm
Off Center

Phantom Holder

6–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)


3. Check that the calculated Iso Center Channel data is within a specification.

If the MEAN value is out of specification (396.75 ± 0.02), perform the following step, then follow the instructions
displayed on the CRT screen.

Adjust the x–ray tube Theta (tangential) position:

a. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.

b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.

c. Install the Dial Indicator onto the cable duct, using the Dial Indicator Attachment Tool (see illustration 6–20).

d. For System with D3142T Tube:

i. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts (see illustration 6–6).

ii. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for THETA; note that there are two THETA nuts for adjustment.

iii. Loosen the nut that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.

iv. Adjust the x–ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

System with D3142T System with D3152T (–) (+)


Tube Tube

clockwise move to the RIGHT move to the LEFT

counterclockwise move to the LEFT move to the RIGHT

v. Tighten the nut previously loosened in step iii.

vi. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts. (Torque: 280 kg–cm)

vii. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.

For System with D3152T Tube:

i. Loosen the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts (see illustration 6–7).

ii. Adjust the x–ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

iii. Tighten the the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts (Torque: 280 kg–cm).

e. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.

4. Proceed to Section 6-9, ‘Filter Center Alignment.’

6–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)

Illustration 6–20 Dial Indicator Attachment

For System with D3142T Tube

Dial Indicator

Dial Indicator Attachment Tool

For System with D3152T Tube

Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator Attachment Tool

6–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT


This ‘Filter Center Alignment’ aligns the filter to the x–ray tube and the Detector.

Illustration 6–21 Filter Center Alignment

X–ray (Fixed)
Tube
Focus
Center of Filter
Adjust

Filter

Ch1
Detector (Fixed)

Filter Center Ch.: 396.75 ± 0.3

VIEW FROM TABLE

1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Iso Center Alignment’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)

d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.

6–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)


2. Select Bowtie Filter Alignment, refer to below:

Service → Automated Alignment → Bowtie Filter Alignment

Perform air and filter scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.

3. Check that the calculated Filter Center Channel data is within a specification:

If the AVERAGE value is out of specification (396.75 ± 0.3), perform the following step, then follow the instruc-
tions displayed on the CRT screen.

a. Adjust the filter Theta (tangential) position:

i. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.

ii. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.

iii. Install the Dial Indicator onto the aperture plate, using the Dial Indicator Attachment Tool (see illustration
6–23).

iv. Loosen the two bolts indicated in illustration 6–22.

v. Rotate the adjustment screw to shift the filter for the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

One turn ≈ 1 mm filter shift.

vi. Tighten the two bolts loosened in step iv.

4. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 6–22 Filter Center Adjustment

Loosen these Bolts


Adjustment
Screw

Collimator with Front Cover Removed

6–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)

Illustration 6–23 Dial Indicator Attachment

For System with D3142T Tube

Dial Indicator

Dial Indicator Attachment Tool


Aperture Plate

For System with D3152T Tube

Dial Indicator

Dial Indicator Attachment Tool


Aperture Plate

6–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT


Note
The radial alignment is rarely performed. Only when loosening the detector locking screw (see Il-
lustration 6–25), this must be performed.

Prerequisite
D Radial Alignment Tool : 2234059

1. Preparation:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.

d. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)

e. Remove the connector cover from the DAS assy.

f. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.

2. Select Radial Alignment, refer to below:

Service → Automated Alignment → Radial Alignment

Perform air and tool scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 6–24 (A).)

Repeat the above scans for the other tool attachment to obtain calculated Radial Alignment data.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 6–24 (A’).)

Illustration 6–24 Radial Alignment Tool

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
A

ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ Radial Align-
ment Tool

A’

6–45 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT (continued)


3. Check that an average of the 2 calculated Radial Alignment data is within a specification.

If not, perform the following steps:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.

b. Remove the Radial Alignment tool.

c. Install a Dial Indicator on the side of the Detector using an attachment tool.

d. Loosen the three (x2) mounting screws and a locking screw.

e. Refer to the average value, rotate the Detector in the specified distance and direction.

f. Tighten the mounting screws and the locking screw.

g. Remove the Dial Indicator with attachment tool.

h. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.

i. Repeat the Radial Alignment procedure, to verify the adjustment.

Illustration 6–25 Locking Screw and Mounting Screws

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Mounting

ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Screws

ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ Mounting
Screws

Locking Screw
Dial Indicator

Detector

Attachment Tool

6–46 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 30 2202123

6-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT (continued)


4. Perform the following alignment:

D ISO Center Alignment

D Filter Center Alignment

5. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

6–47 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

6–48 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

SECTION 7 – SYSTEM CALIBRATION

7-1 GENERAL
This ‘System Calibration’ describes the following check/calibrations/adjustment:

D CAM Amplifier Linearity Check (by performing x–ray exposures)

D Hilight Calibration; consisting of the following:


Q Calibration (Q–cal)
XT Calibration (XT–cal)
AV Calibration (AV–cal)
DG Calibration (DG–cal)

D Air and Phantom Calibrations

D CT Number Adjustment

The above calibrations and adjustment should be performed if any of the following replacements and/or system ad-
justments are performed since the last calibrations/adjustment.
‘CAM Amplifier Linearity Check’ may be performed before calibrations/adjustment.

D X–ray tube replacement

D Detector replacement

D DAS or CAM Board replacement

D Collimator or Filter replacement

D Plane of rotation alignment

D Detector beam–on–window alignment

D Iso center alignment.

D Filter center alignment

7–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-1 GENERAL (continued)


The following table shows that which Hilight calibration (Q–cal, XT–cal, AV–cal, or DG–cal) should be performed for
the above occasions and also the calibration/adjustment order to be followed.

Calibra- Detector X–ray tube or Plane of DAS CAM Board For Twin
tion/Ad- replaced or Collimator or rotation or replaced replaced Only:
justment Detector Filter Iso center or #1 CAM
Order beam–on– replaced Filter center Board (at the
↓ window alignment per- right end)
alignment formed replaced
performed
1 Q–cal Chan- Q–cal Channel Q–cal Chan- – – Q–cal Chan-
nel Ratio Ratio nel Ratio nel Ratio
2 Q–cal Q–cal Q–cal DG–cal Air Cal Air Cal
3 XT–cal Air Cal Air Cal Air Cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal
4 AV–cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal CT Number CT Number
Adjust Adjust
5 Air Cal CT Number Ad- CT Number CT Number – –
just Adjust Adjust
6 Phantom Cal – – – – –
7 CT Number – – – – –
Adjust.
Note: Q–cal channel Ratio is for the Twin system ONLY.

7–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-1 GENERAL (continued)

Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during system calibrations/adjustment.
Make sure they are clean and contrast–free.

Phantom For System with Single De- For System with Twin De-
tector tector
Water Phantom (25 cm) P9110LA/P9100LA 2221972
Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (42 cm) P9110LD/P9100LD 2221975
Quality Assurance Phantom (QA Phantom) P9100SG P9100SG
(See Illustration 7–1.)
Crosstalk Phantom (XT Phantom) 46–278221G1 2221977
(See Illustration 7–1.)

Illustration 7–1 QA Phantom and XT Phantom

QA Phantom XT Phantom

Diameter : 12.6 cm
(Polypropylene)

7–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS)


Perform the following procedure to check that the non–linearity of the CAM Board amplifiers is within 0.1%.

1. Preparation:

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the gantry front cover.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual.)

d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

2. Perform two air stationary scans; one with 100 mA, the other with 200 mA:

a. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:

Service Menu → Offline Scan

b. Select Stationary from ‘Technic – [Scan Type]’.

c. Perform the following scans:

Scan 1 Scan 2
Azimuth : 0 deg. Azimuth : 0 deg.
Scan Time : 1 or 2 sec Scan Time : 1 or 2 sec
(Select the shortest one available. The selection in Scan 1 must be used also in Scan 2.)
Thickness : 10 mm Thickness : 10 mm
Focus : Large Focus : Large
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 100 mA (40 mA )*1 MA : 200 mA (80 mA)*1
(Others) : (defaults) (Others) : (defaults)

*1 : For Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, 2201000–2, 2249696–2

3. Store the following vector files (mean files) 1 and 2 out of the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.

Raw Data File Raw Data File No. to be Se- Mean Vector No. File Comment
lected
(100 or 40 mA Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1 1 100 (or 40)mA Ach
(200 or 80 mA Scan) Exam#2, Series#1, Acq No: 1 2 200 (or 80)mA Ach
Note: “Ach” described in File Comment means A channel for the Twin system ONLY. “Bch” should be
commented when testing B channel.

7–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS) (continued)


a. Select Format Raw Data; refer to below:

Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Format Raw Data

b. For Twin ONLY:


Select A side. (A channel)

c. Select the raw data file (Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.

d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings, then click on OK:

Offset File Correction Yes


Reference Correction Yes
Natural Log Conversion No

e. Select Active Mean as “Select Type of Data:”.

f. Click on Store to File.

g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and 100 (or 40)mA Ach as “File Comment”, then click on OK.

h. Click on Select RawID... to return to the Fan Data Format screen, and repeat steps c to g to make Vector files
2.

4. Apply a division to the vector files No.1 and No.2:

a. Select Vect/Vect. Op; refer to below:

Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis →


Calculations → Vect/Vect. Op

b. Select A/B from ‘Select Operation.’

c. Select MeanFile 1 as as Vect Data File A.

Select MeanFile 2 as as Vect Data File B.

d. Enter 3 as “Output Vector Number” and 100/200 (or 40/80) mA Ach as “Comment”, then click on OK.

5. Check the calculated vector file No.3 using View Vector:

a. Select View Vector; refer to below:

Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis →


View Vector

b. Select MeanFile 3– 100/200mA (or 40/80mA) Ach as “Select SupMean File:”.

c. Click on [Plot].

7–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS) (continued)


d. Select ‘Manual Scale.’

Enter 0.99 for Data Min.

Enter 1.01 for Data Max. (Change this, if necessary)

Click on OK.

A graph is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 7–2.

Check that the non–linearity (shown as “E” in the illustration) is less than 0.001 (0.1 %). In the illustration, “A”
and “B” indicate the average values of approximately 10 channels each. The difference between “B” and “A”
(= “E”) shows the magnitude of the non–linearity of the amplifiers.

6. For Twin ONLY:


Repeat steps 3 to 5 for B Side (B channel).

Illustration 7–2 Non–linearity at Amplification Change

1.005 B 10 channels

E
10 channels

0.995

7–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-3 HILIGHT CALIBRATION

7-3-1 General
This Hilight calibration should be performed prior to the air and phantom calibrations; and the air and phantom calibra-
tions should be performed if once the Hilight calibration is performed.

The x–ray tube must be sufficiently cool (the tube case temperature must be below 10 % heat level).

WARNING
ROTATION HAZARDS! SOME HILIGHT CALIBRATIONS ROTATE THE GANTRY (SEE THE
TABLE BELOW). WHEN HILIGHT CALIBRATION IS PERFORMED WITHOUT THE GANTRY
COVERS INSTALLED, ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT NO PERSON IS IN THE SCAN ROOM.

Hilight Calibration Does gantry rotate?


Q–CAL Yes (The Gantry rotates during warm–up sequence,
but stops during data acquisition sequence.)
XT–CAL Yes
AV–CAL No
DG–CAL Yes (The Gantry rotates during warm–up sequence,
but stops during data acquisition sequence.)

7–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-3-2 Q Calibration
The focus position of the x–ray tube shifts with temperature change. It will consequently shift the x–ray beam position
along the Z–axis. In this calibration, the following scans are automatically performed:
D four scans (Thickness: 1, 3, 5, and 10 mm) (when the x–ray tube is cold)
D warm–up scans
D four scans (Thickness: 1, 3, 5, and 10 mm) (when the x–ray tube is hot)
This calibration takes approximately 10 minutes.

1. Preparation:

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the gantry front cover.

Note
The bow–tie filter must be removed during Q calibration for both single and Twin detector system.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual.)

d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

2. For System with D3152T Tube:


Ensure that the x–ray tube case is at 10% or lower heat level.

3. Select Q–CAL; refer to below:

Service Menu → Service Calibration → Q–CAL

4. Follow the procedure that appears on the CRT screen.

7-3-3 XT Calibration
The Lumex crystals of the detector cells generate light when they are hit by x–rays. Since the crystals are placed close
to the crystals of the adjacent channels, the light from one channel can interfere with adjacent channels, causing
crosstalk noise. This procedure creates a calibration file to compensate this interference.
This calibration takes approximately 15 minutes.

1. Preparation:

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the gantry front cover.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual.)

d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

7–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-3-3 XT Calibration (continued)


2. Select XT–CAL; refer to below:

Service Menu → Service Calibration → XT–CAL

3. Perform air scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.

WARNING
ROTATION HAZARDS! WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON
AND SMALL BUTTON), THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE 0_ POSITION. IF IT IS
NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH
OFF THE ‘SCAN’ SWITCH FIRST.

4. Position the XT phantom at the (scan center + 180 mm) height:

a. Install the XT phantom to the phantom holder.

b. Shift the phantom to the up–limit, using the up–down adjuster.

c. Position the phantom at the scan center; align the positioning lights and a cross marked on the phantom sur-
face.

d. Hold down the [Height] button to display the current height (ex. ‘–198’), and press the [Up] button to raise the
Table by 180 mm (ex. Until the Display reads ‘–018’).

If the Table can not be raised to the specified height due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the T3 Table
dip switch on the TGP Board to disable the interlock function, and continue to raise the Table. In this case, be
careful not to have the Table collide against anything.

e. Select [Confirm] on the screen.

Illustration 7–3 XT Phantom Centering

Do not position this area to the lights

Positioning
Lights

Up/Down Adjuster

7–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-3-3 XT Calibration (continued)


5. Follow the instructions that appear on the CRT screen.

6. Switch OFF the T3 Table dip switch (if it is set to ON) on the TGP Board.

NOTICE
Do not forget to switch OFF the T3 Table dip switch (if it is set to ON), otherwise there will
be collision hazard, since the interlock function does not work, if T3 is set to ON.

7-3-4 AV Calibration
The light emission of the Lumex Crystal persists after the x–ray radiation stops. This phenomenon is called ‘After
Glow.’ This procedure creates a file called After Glow Vector, used to compensate the After Glow.
This calibration takes approximately 2 minutes.

1. Preparation:

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the gantry front cover.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual.)

d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

2. Select AV–CAL; refer to below:

Service Menu → Service Calibration → AV–CAL

3. Follow the procedure that appears on the CRT screen.

7–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-3-5 DG Calibration
If some scans are performed with the same conditions but with different scan times, the CT numbers may not be the
same for these scans. This is due to CAM Board gain changes caused by different scan times. The DG calibration
reduces the CT number changes.
This calibration takes approximately 3 minutes.

1. Preparation:

a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.

b. Remove the gantry front cover.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual.)

d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.

2. Select DG–CAL; refer to below:

Service Menu → Service Calibration → DG–CAL

3. Follow the procedure that appears on the CRT screen.

7–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-4 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS

Precondition
D The bow–tie filter should be installed.

1. Select Service Adjustment from the Service menu.

2. Select Service Calibration from the Service Adjustment.

3. Select Auto Sequence 1 (Air Cal → Phantom Cal) from the Service Calibration menu.

4. Select [Confirm] on the screen to select all the calibration stations.

5. Follow the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.

6. Proceed to the ‘CT Number Adjustment’ procedure.

7–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 25 2202123

7-5 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT


Perform this <CT Number Adjustment> after completing the air and phantom calibrations.
In addition, if you have any doubt whether the CT numbers of the phantom are good or not, perform the CT Number
Adjustment. This adjustment modifies the CT numbers of the 25 cm and 50 cm CAL files until water has a CT number
equal to zero and air has a CT number equal to –1000.

It takes approximately 30 minutes to complete this adjustment.

Note
The CT# of water will change according to its temperature by a factor of –0.4/_C.

1. Select Service –> CT Number Adjustment

2. Follow the procedure that appears on the CRT screen.


(Select all kV.)

Note
If you do not click on Confirm in the scan confirm screen within 15 minutes, Time–out occurs.

3. Verify that the water CT # and air CT # equal 0 ±3 and –1000 ±5 respectively.

Note
For the Twin System only, the followings are displayed in the result screen.
A: A channel, B: B channel, F: Fused scan (for the system with asymmetric scan option installed only)

Note
For the system with the asymmetric option only, the CT # value displayed is the original one. Note
that the updated data is NOT displayed.

7–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

7–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

SECTION 8 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

8-1 GENERAL
This ‘Image Performance Verification’ contains tables of scan techniques and specifications for evaluating image
performance.

Sample Image
The system contains the MOD that includes the images saved before shipment from the manufacturer as sample
data. (The calibration data are also included in the same MOD.)

You can use these images as a reference when you perform image troubleshooting.

To restore the image to the system:


Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Archive –> Restore –>
Selection –> All examination –> Restore –> Restore examination –> OK)
After restoring image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.

General Requirements
Perform the following before continuing:

1. Verify that system calibration (Hilight calibration, air and phantom calibrations, and CT Number Adjustment) has
been completed.
All image performance scans must use calibration data that are less than eight hours old.

2. Warm up the system at least two hours (minimum) prior to data collection.

Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during image performance verification.
Make sure they are clean and contrast–free.

D Water Phantom (25 cm)

D Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (42 cm)

D Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom

8–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

8-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE


1. Acquire the scans listed in Table 8–1, 8–2, 8–3 or 8–4.

Select ‘Abdomen,’ or any anatomy of interest for ‘Infant.’

The phantoms to be scanned should be centered.

2. For each slice, verify the following:

D Visually check each image for rings, bands, streaks, shadings or artifacts near the image center.

D Position a circular ROI at the locations listed below (see also Illustration 8–1) and write down the data on
Table 8–1, 8–2, 8–3 or 8–4.

Mc – Mean CT number of a center ROI.

SD – Standard deviation of a center ROI.

Mo – Mean CT number of a ROI 10 cm off center (Y = 0).

D The following ROI sizes (area) are used to measure ROI data.

FOV ROI AREA


25 cm 674.11 mm2
50 cm 2696.45 mm2

To display a ROI data;


a. Position a cursor (here, a circle cursor).
b. Press the [ROI] key.

Verify that the data falls within the specifications shown in Table 8–1, 8–2, 8–3 or 8–4.

Note
The CT# of water will change according to its temperature by a factor of –0.4/_C.

High Contrast Spatial Resolution and Artifact Check Using QA (Quality Assurance) Phantom
3. The 1.0 mm pattern (see Illustration 8–2) must be clearly visible by the following techniques:

Kind of Scan FOV (cm) KV Time (sec) mA THK (mm) Interval (mm)
Axial Head 25 120 2.0 150 10 –
Helical Head 25 120 2.0 150 10 10
Axial Body 50 120 1.5 130 10 –
Helical Body 50 120 1.5 130 10 10

Check if any artifact is observed on the image or not.

8–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

8-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE (continued)

Illustration 8–1 ROI Locations

+Y ROI Circle
(Area of 674.11 mm2 or 2696.45 mm2)
Image

–X +X
Mc (0.0 cm)
Mo (10.0 cm)
SD (0.0 cm)

–Y

Illustration 8–2 QA Phantom

1.0 mm Pattern

8–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

8-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE


The 46–241852G1 Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom is used by both the customers and service people to assess
image quality in accordance with BRH requirements (21CFR, Section 1030 33). Use of this phantom is described in
the Operator’s Manual.

The operator’s manual instructs customers to perform QA checks on a daily basis. Service persons, however, shall
perform QA checks after any of the following events has occurred:

D System installation

D X–ray tube replacement

D Detector replacement

D Periodic maintenance.

Note
The service person shall complete all of the procedures in the Operator’s Manual.

8–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

Table 8–1 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2200997, 2200997–2, 2200999, 2200999–2, 2201000, 2201000–2
2249696 or 2249696–2 ) (BS1 or 2, LXi, FXi, DXi)

PTM FOV*1 KV TIME*2 MA*3 THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) A *5 B*6

MC SD MO MC SD MO MC SD MO

42 cm PP Large 120 1 250 10 M10 ≤ 15.2 – M10 ≤ 15.2 – – –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100

42 cm PP Large 120 0.8 300 10 M10 ± 2 ≤ 15.6 – M10 ± 2 ≤ 15.6 – –

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 0±3 ≤ 5.4 XC ± 3 0±3 ≤ 4.5 XC ± 3

25 cm WTR Small 120 0.8 300 10 0±2 ≤ 5.4 XC ± 2 0±2 ≤ 4.5 XC ± 2

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 300 7 0±2 ≤ 6.0 – 0±2 ≤ 5.0 – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 300 5 0±2 ≤ 7.2 _ 0±2 ≤ 6.0 _ –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 300 3 0±2 ≤ 7.7 _ 0±2 ≤ 6.4 _ –

25 cm WTR Small 120 2 200 2 0±3 ≤ 9.9 _ 0±3 ≤ 8.2 _ –

25 cm WTR Small 120 3 200 1 0±3 ≤ 10.8 _ 0±3 ≤ 9.0 _ –

25 cm WTR Small 120 2 300 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ –

25 cm WTR Small 120 2 250 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ –

25 cm WTR Small 120 2 200 10 0±2 ≤ 4.2 _ 0±2 ≤ 3.5 _ –

25 cm WTR Small 120 2 160 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ –

8–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

Table 8–1 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2200997, 2200997–2, 2200999, 2200999–2, 2201000, 2201000–2
2249696, or 2249696–2 ) (BS1 or 2, LXi, FXi, DXi) (continued)

PTM FOV KV TIME MA THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) A *5 B *6

MC SD MO MC SD MO MC SD MO

25 cm WTR Small 120 2 130 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 2 100 10 0±2 – _ 0±2 – _ – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 2 80 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 2 60 10 0±2 ≤ 8.4 _ 0±2 ≤ 7.0 _ –

25 cm WTR Small 140 2 250 10 0±2 ≤ 3.5 _ 0±2 ≤ 2.5 _ –


(200)*5

25 cm WTR Small 80 2 300 10 0±2 – _ 0±2 – _ – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 80 10 M101∼ _ _ M101∼ _ _ – – Perform 30 slices/30 sec scan.


M130 M130 M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M130 = M101 ± 2

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 40 10 _ _ _ _ _ _ – – – Perform 120 slices/120 sec scan.


(See Note 4)
Smudge or band artifact might be ob-
served around the image center; regard
these as normal.

*1: Large: 50 cm or 45.5 cm Small: 25 cm


*2: 0.8 sec: for systems where 0.8 sec scan is available only.
*3: 300 mA: for systems where the maximum MA available is 300 mA only.
*4: For systems which have a 120 continuous scan capability only.
*5 For Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, 2201000–2, 2249696–2 only.
*6 For Gantry 2200997, 2200999, 2201000, 2249696 only.

8–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

Table 8–2 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2247002 or 2247002–3 ) (ZXi)

PTM FOV KV TIME MA THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description

(cm) (sec) (mm) MC SD Md MC SD Md

42cm PP Large 120 0.7 90 10 –110<Mc<–90 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 90 7 Mc ± 3 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 120 5 Mc ± 3 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 200 3 Mc ± 3 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 200 2 Mc ± 5 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 200 1 –1 ≤ Mc ≤ +9 – – – –

25cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 0±3 < 4.5 Mc ± 3 Note 1

25cm WTR Small 120 1 250 10 0±3 <3 Mc ± 2 Note 2

25cm WTR Large 120 1 10 10 – < 30 – – –

25cm WTR Small 120 1 10 10 – < 20 – – –

25cm WTR Small 120 0.7 380 10 0±2 < 4.5 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 1 380 7 0±2 < 4.5 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 1.5 350 5 0±2 < 4.5 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 2 440 3 0±2 < 4.5 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 2 150 2 0±3 <9 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 3 200 1 0±3 <9 – –

25cm WTR Large 140 1 160 10 0±2 <8 – –

25cm WTR Small 140 1 40 10 0±2 <9 – –

Note 1 : Md ROI Location (X . Y cm) = (9 . 0 cm)


Note 2 : Md ROI Location (X . Y cm) = (10 . 0 cm)

8–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

Table 8–2 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2247002 or 2247002–3 ) (ZXi) (continued)

PTM FOV KV TIME MA THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description

(cm) (sec) (mm) MC SD Md MC SD Md

42cm PP Large 120 1 200 5 – – – – – – Note 3

42cm PP Large 120 1 60 10 – – – – – – Note 4

Resolution Small 120 1.5 130 10 – – – – – – Note 5

QA Small 120 1 230 10 – <3 – – –

QA Small 120 1 230 10 – <3 – – –

Note 3 : Perform 30 slices/30 sec scan.


Smudge or band artifact is not on the image.
Note 4 : For systems which have a 120 continuous scan capability only.
Note 5 : Confirm 1mm slit.

8–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

Table 8–3 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2246999, 2246999–3, 2247000, 2247000–3, 2247001, 2247001–3,
2247799 , or 2247799–3 ) (BS3, LXi, FXi, DXi)

PTM FOV KV TIME MA THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description

(cm) (sec) (mm) MC SD Md MC SD Md

42cm PP Large 120 0.8 80 10 –110<Mc<–90 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 90 7 Mc ± 3 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 120 5 Mc ± 3 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 200 3 Mc ± 3 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 200 2 Mc ± 5 – – – –

42cm PP Large 120 1 200 1 –1 ≤ Mc ≤ +9 – – – –

25cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 0±3 < 3.1 Mc ± 3 Note 1

25cm WTR Small 120 1 250 10 0±3 < 4.9 Mc ± 2 Note 2

25cm WTR Large 120 1 10 10 – < 17.8 – – –

25cm WTR Small 120 1 10 10 – < 32 – – –

25cm WTR Small 120 0.8 260 10 0±2 < 5.4 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 1 300 7 0±2 < 5.4 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 1.5 280 5 0±2 < 5.4 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 2 350 3 0±2 < 5.4 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 2 150 2 0±3 < 10.5 – –

25cm WTR Small 120 3 200 1 0±3 < 11.3 – –

25cm WTR Large 140 1 160 10 0±2 < 3.7 – –

25cm WTR Small 140 1 40 10 0±2 < 10.3 – –

Note 1 : Md ROI Location (X . Y cm) = (9 . 0 cm)


Note 2 : Md ROI Location (X . Y cm) = (10 . 0 cm)

8–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

Table 8–3 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2246999, 2246999–3, 2247000, 2247000–3, 2247001, 2247001–3,
2247799 or 2247799–3 ) (BS3, LXi, FXi, DXi) (continued)

PTM FOV KV TIME MA THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description

(cm) (sec) (mm) MC SD Md MC SD Md

42cm PP Large 120 1 200 5 – – – – – – Note 3

42cm PP Large 120 1 60 10 – – – – – – Note 4

Resolution Small 120 1.5 130 10 – – – – – – Note 5

QA Small 120 1 230 10 – < 3.3 – – –

QA Small 120 1 230 10 – < 3.3 – – –

Note 3 : Perform 30 slices/30 sec scan.


Smudge or band artifact is not on the image.
Note 4 : For systems which have a 120 continuous scan capability only.
Note 5 : Confirm 1mm slit.

8–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

Table 8–4 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2247010, 2247010–x, 2249696, or 2249696–x ) (NX/i, NX/i Pro)

IMPORTANT NOTE:
Perform continuously two scans, then use the second data for this check.

PTM FOV*1 KV TIME MA*2 THK Mode SPECIFICATION DATA Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) 1i mode 2i mode

A B |Del- SD ratio
ta(A–B)| (A/B)
MC SD MC SD MC SD MC SD

42 cm PP Large 120 1 250 10 2i – – – – – – – – No Rings/


Bands
42 cm PP Large 120 1 250 10 1i – – – – checked visu-
ally
42 cm PP Large 120 1 160 1 2i – – – – – – – –

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 2i 0±2 ≤ 3.1 0±2 ≤ 3.1 5 1 ± 0.1

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 1i 0±2 ≤ 3.1


25 cm WTR Large 120 1 250 7 2i 0±2 ≤ 3.7 0±2 ≤ 3.7 5 1 ± 0.1

25 cm WTR Large 140 1 160 10 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Large 80 3 250 10 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Large 140 1 160 7 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Large 80 3 250 7 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 250 10 2i 0±2 ≤ 4.9 0±2 ≤ 4.9 5 1 ± 0.1

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 250 10 1i 0±2 ≤ 4.9


25 cm WTR Large 120 1 60 10 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 90 7 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 120 5 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 200 3 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

8–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 28 2202123

Table 8–4 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2247010, 2247010–x, 2249696, or 2249696–x ) (NX/i, NX/i Pro)

PTM FOV*1 KV TIME MA*2 THK Mode SPECIFICATION DATA Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) 1i mode 2i mode

A B |Del- SD ratio
ta(A–B)| (A/B)
MC SD MC SD MC SD MC SD

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 300 2 2i 0±3 – 0±3 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 200 1 2i 0±3 – 0±3 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 60 10 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 90 7 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 120 5 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 200 3 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 300 2 2i 0±3 – 0±3 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Small 120 1 200 1 2i 0±3 – 0±3 – 5 – –

25 cm WTR Large 140 1 60 10 1i 0±2 –

25 cm WTR Large 140 1 100 6 1i 0±2 –

25 cm WTR Large 140 1 150 4 1i 0±2 –

25 cm WTR Large 140 1 300 2 1i 0±3 –

25 cm WTR Small 140 1 60 10 1i 0±2 –

25 cm WTR Small 140 1 100 6 1i 0±2 –

25 cm WTR Small 140 1 150 4 1i 0±2 –

25 cm WTR Small 140 1 300 2 1i 0±3 –

*1: Large: 50 cm or 45.5 cm Small: 25 cm


*2: 300 mA: for systems where the maximum MA available is 300 mA only.

8–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

OPERATOR CONSOLE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – OC COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-3 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-3-1 General Procedures for Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-3-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1-4 CLAMP LIMIT SWITCH (FOR MOBILE SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

SECTION 2 – OC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-5 MISC TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-6 WORKSTATION DEFAULT TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12

i OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

ii OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

SECTION 1 – OC COMPONENTS

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER BEFORE
YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES


The Operator Console contains two power supplies: +12V, –12V and +5V.

1. Switch OFF the Operator Console.

2. Remove the OC front and EMC covers.

3. Swing out the speaker panel assy, to access the OC power supplies (see illustration 1–1).

Ground Connection
If this is the first time to check the OC power supplies after system installation, preform this ‘Ground Connection’
check.

4. Check the ground connection of the power supplies as follows (see illustration 1–1):

Note
When you adjust power supply potentiometers, slowly turn them; otherwise, power supply built–in
protector will shou themselves down. If this happens, switch OFF the Operator Console, wait approx-
imately three minutes, and switch ON the Console.

a. Connect a digital multimeter between the OC ground stud and ground (FG Ground) on one power supply.
(Multimeter: resistance measure mode)

b. Verify that the resistance reads less than 0.2 ohms. If resistance exceeds the above value, tighten, clean or
re–crimp connections, and measure again.

c. Perform the above check on the other power supply.

1–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued)

Illustration 1–1 OC DC Power Supplies

+5V Power
Supply
+12V Power
Supply

Front Cover
EMC Cover
–12 V Power NAA Assy
Supply

Speaker Panel Assy

1–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued)

Voltage Check
5. Check the output of the +5 VDC power supply as follows:

a. Switch ON the Operator Console

b. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip (J18) on the NPSC assy (Multimeter: voltage measure mode)
(see illustration 1–2).

c. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +4.90 VDC ∼ +5.10 VDC. If it falls outside these limits, adjust it
by turning the potentiometer (see illustration 1–1).

d. Connect an oscilloscope to the dame points as above.

e. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 200mVp–p. If it falls outside this range, replace the
power supply.

6. Check the output of the +12 VDC power supply as follows:

a. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip (J19) on the NPSC assy (Multimeter: voltage measure mode)
(see illustration 1–2).

b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +11.76 VDC ∼ +12.24 VDC. If it falls outside these limits, adjust
it by turning the potentiometer (see illustration 1–1).

c. Connect an oscilloscope to the dame points as above.

d. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 100mVp–p. If it falls outside this range, replace the
power supply.

7. Check the output of the –12 VDC power supply as follows:

a. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip (J20) on the NPSC assy (Multimeter: voltage measure mode)
(see illustration 1–2).

b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within –11.76 VDC ∼ –12.24 VDC. If it falls outside these limits, adjust
it by turning the potentiometer (see illustration 1–1).

c. Connect an oscilloscope to the dame points as above.

d. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 100mVp–p. If it falls outside this range, replace the
power supply.

1–3 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued)

Illustration 1–2 Measure Point for DC Power Supplies

SCSI bay

NPSC Assy

J18 J19 J20

1–4 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-2 FANS
1. Turn OFF the OC main power.

2. Remove the following covers:

D OC Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four(4) Screws


D EMC Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four(4) Screws
D Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four(4) Screws

3. Using a flashlight, or by feeling for the proper airflow, check that the FAN is operating normally.

If any fan is defective, replace the unit.

Illustration 1–3 OC Fan Locations

Power Supply
FAN

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ FANs

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
Nest Assy

FANs

FANs

1–5 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-3 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES


This section describes how to adjust the monitor. For other adjustments (listed below) without description in this sec-
tion, refer to Installation Procedure, Section 1, Monitor Set–Up.

Item Reference Manual


Installation Functional Check / Adjustment
(this manual)
Contrast x
Brightness x
Manual Degaussing x
Memory Recall x
H. Position x
H. Size x
V. Position x
V. Size x
V. Pincushion x
Trapezoidal x
Parallelogram x
Rotation x
Color Temp x
User Color x
Disp. Freq x
Video Input Level x
Input Select x
H. Moire Reduction x
V. Moire Reduction x
Language selection x

1-3-1 General Procedures for Setup


For usage of adjustment menu, refer to Installation Procedure, Section 4, Monitor Set–Up.

1–6 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-3 CRT Monitor Controls and Switches (Continued)

1-3-2 Adjustment
The adjustment items are represented by icon. (Refer to Illustration 1–4.)

Illustration 1–4 Setup Menu

MENU DISPLAYED

User Color
The white in the video image can be adjusted to the user’s preferred color.

Note
Memory recall of the user’s color is not possible. So, record initial setting before starting adjustment.

1. Press 1 button on the front panel of the monitor to display setup menu.

2. Move the Cursor to “User color” icon.

3. Press 2 button to enter adjustment menu.

4. Press 2 button to select R (red), G (green), or B (blue).

5. Using or button, adjust color as desired.

6. Press 1 button twice to register value and exit from the menu.

1–7 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-3 CRT Monitor Controls and Switches (Continued)

Video Input Level


The video input signal level can be matched to the computer being used.

1. Press 1 button on the front panel of the monitor to display setup menu.

2. Move the Cursor to “Video Input Level” icon.

3. Press 2 button to enter adjustment menu.

4. Press 2 button to select either 1 V or 0.7V.

5. Press 1 button twice to register value and exit from the menu.

Input Select
The Input signal port can be selected.

Note
When power management is in effect on either port A or port B, the input cannot be switched from
one to the other. Release power management before switching terminal selection.

1. Press 1 button on the front panel of the monitor to display setup menu.

2. Move the Cursor to “Input Select” icon.

3. Press 2 button to enter adjustment menu.

4. Press 2 button to select either the rear panel input terminal port A (Mini D–sub type) or port B (BNC type).

5. Press 1 button twice to register value and exit from the menu.

1–8 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-3 CRT Monitor Controls and Switches (Continued)

H. Moire Reduction

NOTICE
If moire reduction is overcorrected, the picture quality (for improper focus, improper vertical
line stability, etc.) will sometimes be affected. Keep this adjustment within the range in which
the picture quality is not affected.

Moire pattern are caused by interference of the CRT dot pitch and video signal due to the resolution of the input signal,
video pattern, etc., producing patterns of horizontal stripes (Horizontal moire pattern) or vertical stripes (Vertical moire
pattern).

1. Press 1 button on the front panel of the monitor to display setup menu.

2. Move the Cursor to “H. Moire Reduction” icon.

3. Press 2 button to enter adjustment menu.

4. Press 2 button to switch ON the moire correction circuit. (Toggle button)

5. Using or button, adjust so that the striped moire pattern is in optimum condition.
button decreases the amount of adjustment.
button increases the amount of adjustment.

6. Press 1 button twice to register value and exit from the menu.

V. Moire Reduction
Refer to H. Moire Reduction procedure described above.

Language Selection
The language of the On–screen display can be selected from among German, French, English, Italian, and Spanish
(Japanese is not available).

1. Press 1 button on the front panel of the monitor to display setup menu.

2. Move the Cursor to “Language Selection” icon.

3. Press 2 button to enter adjustment menu.

4. Using or button, select language as desired.

5. Press 1 button twice to register value and exit from the menu.

1–9 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-3 CRT Monitor Controls and Switches (Continued)

Resetting to Factory Preset Level


To reset all of the monitor adjustment to factory preset levels:

1. Press 1 button.

2. Move the Cursor to (Memory Recall).

3. Press 2 button to enter factory preset menu.

4. Press 1 button (YES) to reset the settings to the factory preset level.

Note
If there are no operations performed for approx. 30 seconds, the screen goes off without resetting
data.

5. Press 1 button to exit from setup menu.

If the image has irregular colors:


Use MANUAL DEGAUSSING to reduce the irregular colors in the image if irregular colors are dis-
played in the image after moving the monitor or changing the monitor angle.

a. Press 1 button.

b. Move the Cursor to (Manual Degaussing).

c. Press 2 button to execute this function.

d. Press 1 button to exit from the setup menu.

1–10 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-4 CLAMP LIMIT SWITCH (FOR MOBILE SYSTEM)


1. Pull the Lock Lever up to release the OC lock.

2. Unscrew the two screws, and remove the OC Lock Switch Cover.

3. Verify that the Clamp Limit Switch is the following state:

Illustration 1–5 Clamp Limit Switch

Lock Unlock Lock Lever


Plunger

Plunger

If not, adjust the Limit Switch position by moving the Switch Base.

Illustration 1–6 Switch Base

Screws(x2)
Switch Base Limit Switch

1–11 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

1–12 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

SECTION 2 – OC OPERATION

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER BEFORE
YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.

2-1 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE


The processor of the Operator Console starts with a power–on self test right after powered on, as follows:

D System disk test

D CD–ROM test

D MOD Driver test

D ST1800 test

D DASM test

D Raw data disk test

D NPR (Recon board) test


–PCI test, DSP test

D DBPCI board test


–PCI test

D HINV (Hardware Inventory) test

2–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-1 OC Power–up Sequence (Continued)


The test progress information is displayed on the CRT monitor.

After the power–on test completes with no error occurred, the processor loads the OS and application software from
the hard disk into memory and starts the application software.
When no error is found in these processes, the start–up screen will be shown on the CRT monitor.

If error occurs, the power–on test will stop and the test log window appears. You can confirm the problem by reviewing
test log, then select either of the following:

D [H/W diag] : Go to [H/W diag Main Menu]


(Refer to Diagnostics manual.)

Note
Using [H/W diag Main Menu] –> [Offline test] –> [Quick] or [Normal], the detailed power–on test can
be performed.

NOTICE
When the interactive test or off–line test is completed, the system MUST be powered OFF
([Exit] –> [OK]) to avoid accidental X–ray Exposure. That is because system reboot can NOT
activate the system reset line.

D [Startup] : The error is skipped and the power–on sequence proceeds so that the start–up screen will be
shown on the CRT monitor.

Note
When the start–up screen does NOT appear even if using the [Startup] command, the system must
be shutdown using [shutdown] button in the desktop menu.

D [Shutdown] : The system runs the shutdown sequence, resulting in the system powered OFF automatical-
ly.

2–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST


This includes the following main tests:

D Color test

D Display pattern test

1. Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Monitor Test].
The monitor test screen appears.

2. To return to [Interactive Test Menu], click on [Back].

Note
To exit from [H/W Diagnostics] menu, the system must be rebooted so that the [Exit] button must be
used to shut down the system.

Color
3. Click on any color key (RED, GREEN, BLUE, WHITE, or BLACK).
The display color changes in the selected one.

4. Verify that no hole exits on the monitor display.

5. To exit from this test, press the left button of the mouse.
This operation returns to the monitor test screen.

Display Pattern
6. Click on any pattern key (Flat, Horizontal Gradation 1 or 2, or Vertical Gradation 1 or 2).
The display pattern changes in the selected one.

7. Using the test pattern to be displayed, adjust position, size, trapezoid, or parallelogram of the monitor.
(For adjustment, refer to Installation, Wiring and Power–ON.)

8. To exit from this test, press the left button of the mouse.
This operation returns to the monitor test screen.

Auto Sequence Test


This runs the mixing tests of color and display pattern described above automatically. To go to next test, press the
left button of the mouse.

2–3 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST


This includes the following main tests:

D Input test

D LED ON/OFF/Flash test

D 103 keyboard test

1. Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Keyboard Test].
The keyboard test screen appears.

2. To return to [Interactive Test Menu], click on [Back].

Note
To exit from [H/W Diagnostics] menu, the system must be rebooted so that the [Exit] button must be
used to shut down the system.

Input Test
This test sends command from the keyboard to the screen (system).

3. Press any key on the keyboard.

4. Verify that the key on the screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.

LED ON/OFF/Flash Test


This test sends command from the screen (system) to the keyboard.

5. Press any button ( [Prescribed Tilt], [Move to Scan], [Stop Move], [Start Scan], [Pause], [X–ray on], [Stop Scan],
[Emergency Stop], or [Talk] ) on the screen.

6. Verify that the key on the keyboard related to the pressed screen key is ON, OFF, or Flashed.

103 Keyboard Test


7. Select [103 Keyboard Test].
The keyboard test screen disappear, then the 103 Keyboard Test screen will appear.

8. Press any button on the keyboard.

9. Verify that the key on the keyboard screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.

10. Click on any place on the 103 keyboard test screen using the left button of the mouse to returns to the keyboard
test screen.

Note
The LEDs for Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock MUST be OFF before exiting from the 103 key-
board test. If it is not, it has significant impact on other tests.

2–4 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST


This includes the following main tests:

D OC speaker test, including tests for Auto Voice, CD player, X–ray ON, and Alert

D Gantry speaker test, including Auto Voice and CD player

1. Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Audio Test].
The Audio test screen appears.

2. To return to [Interactive Test Menu], click on [Back].

Note
To exit from [H/W Diagnostics] menu, the system must be rebooted so that the [Exit] button must be
used to shut down the system.

OC Speaker – Auto Voice


3. Click on [Show Player] for Auto Voice.

4. Click on [Audio] . The Input/Output screen appears.

5. Click on [Output] . The audio confidence test screen appears.

6. Click on [OK]. The voice message, “This is audio confidence test. If...” will be heard from the OC speaker.

7. While playing auto voice message, move the L and R volume sliders for Auto voice so that the message will be-
come loud or faint.

Note
When the [Play Back] button is ON, a sound via the Gantry microphone (patient voice) will NOT be
heard from the OC speaker. This function is one for recording, so that the [Play Back] button MUST
be OFF when exiting from this test if it is performed.

8. Click on [OK] again. The audio confidence test screen disappears.

9. Click on [Exit] to exit from this test.

OC Speaker – CD player
10. Click on [Show Player] for CD (music) player of the OC.

11. Set a music CD into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

12. While playing CD, move the L and R volume sliders for CD so that sound will become loud or faint.

2–5 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST (Continued)

OC Speaker – X–ray ON Buzzer


13. Click on [ON/OFF] button so that it remains ON. Verify that X–ray ON buzzer continues to sound until the button
is OFF.

14. Move the [Mod] (Modulation) and [Freq] (Frequency) slider for X–ray ON buzzer so that sound varies.

15. Move the L and R volume sliders for the X–ray ON buzzer so that sound will become loud or faint.

16. Click on [ON/OFF] button so that it remains OFF.

OC Speaker – Alert
17. Click on [ON] button once. Verify that alert sounds once.

18. Move the [Width] and [Freq] (Frequency) slider for Alert so that sound varies.

19. Move the L and R volume sliders for Alert so that sound will become loud or faint.

Table Speaker – Auto Voice / CD Player


20. When adjusting the Table speaker for Auto Voice or CD player, use buttons for OC speaker.

Note
When adjusting the speaker volume for Auto Voice, use the volume on the OC keyboard.

Audio Setting Save / Load


When current Audio setting want to be temporarily saved, click on [Save] button. Then modifying setting and clicking
on [Load] returns to the setting before modification.

Note
The file saved will be deleted when shutting down the system since it is a temporary file.

2–6 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-5 MISC TEST


This includes the following tests:

D Hardware Inventory

D SCSI test

D View SYSLOG

D NPR LED Test

D Safety Loop test

D Shutdown test

1. Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Misc Test].
The Misc test selection window appears.

2. To return to [Interactive Test Menu], click on [Back].

Note
To exit from [H/W Diagnostics] menu, the system must be rebooted so that the [Exit] button must be
used to shut down the system.

Hardware Inventory
This program shows the hardware configuration of the Host Computer. This program runs “hinv” command.

Note
When changing the hardware configuration (e.g. Memory addition, Disk change...), always run this
program to check if the system properly recognizes the hardware to be changed.

3. Click on [Hardware Inventory] from the Misc test selection window.


The list of hardware connected to the host computer appear.

4. Click on [Close] to return to the Misc test selection window.

2–7 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-5 MISC TEST (Continued)


D Example for Result to be displayed:

.................
.................
.................
Integral SCSI controller 0:Version ADAPTEC 7880 # On–board SCSI controller 0
Disk drive: unit 1 on SCSI controller 0 # SYSTEM DISK/IMAGE DISK
Disk drive: unit 2 on SCSI controller 0 # OPTION IMAGE DISK
Integral SCSI controller 1:Version ADAPTEC 7880 # On–board SCSI controller 1
CDROM: unit 1 on SCSI controller 1 # CDROM
Disk drive: unit 3 on SCSI controller 1 # OPTION DASM
Comm device: unit 4 on SCSI controller 1 # ST1800
Comm device: unit 4, lun 1 on SCSI controller 1
Optical disk: unit 5 on SCSI controller 1 # OPTION Pioneer MOD
Optical disk: unit 6 on SCSI controller 1 # STD MOD
PCI SCSI controller 3: Version ADAPTEC 7880 # SCSI PCI card
Disk drive: unit 1 on SCSI controller 3 # RAW DISK 1
Disk drive: unit 2 on SCSI controller 3 # (OPTION) RAW DISK 2
.................
.................
.................
– Adaptec SCSI : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 36868, device 32888) pci slot 1
– Adaptec SCSI : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 36868, device 32888) pci slot 2
– Bit3 PCI Exp : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4113, device 36) pci slot 3
– Bit3 PCI Exp : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4113, device 36) pci slot 4
– NPR (RECON) : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4277, device 36961) pci slot 5
– DBPCI (DAS Buf) : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4277, device 36960) pci slot 6
– DBPCI (DAS Buf) : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4277, device 36960) pci slot 7 # For TWIN
Only
– Bit3 PCI Exp : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4113, device 36) pci slot 4
– Adaptec SCSI : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 36868, device 33144) pci slot 4
.................
.................
.................

D If “Bit3 xxxx” is NOT displayed, check the following cable for loose connection or short circuit:

– Signal cable between CPU board and PCI backplane controller card

– Power cable between NPD J8 and PCI backplane P8/P9

D The unit number of the SCSI device to be displayed MUST be the same number as the device ID.

2–8 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-5 MISC TEST (continued)

SCSI Test
This program runs HDD access test, CD–ROM access test, MOD #0 access test, MOD #1 access test, ST–1800
access test, and DASM access test so that their results will be displayed.

Note
SCSI information can be known by the hardware inventory test, but this SCSI test will give you more
detailed information.

Note
For Option Image disk, this SCSI test will be skipped, so that this result is NOT displayed.

5. Click on [SCSI Test] from the Misc test selection window.


The result of their tests appear.

6. Click on [Close] to return to the Misc test selection window.

2–9 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-5 MISC TEST (Continued)

View SYSLOG
This program displays system log information after last reboot.

7. Click on [View SYSLOG] from the Misc test selection window.


The system log information appears.

8. Click on [Close] to return to the Misc test selection window.

Note
The system log to be displayed shows only a day’s worth of log after last reboot. When the following
day comes, the log of the day before is saved on “SYSLOG.0” file, then it will be deleted from the
SYSLOG viewing window.

Note
8 day’s worth of log files are being saved as a backup on the directory “/var/adm”. You can see them
using “ls” and “cat” commands. Today’s log is “SYSLOG”. Yesterday’s is “SYSLOG.0”.

NPRM LED Test


This program can check if

9. Remove the front cover of the OC, then remove the Nest cover to access the NPRM board.

10. Click on [NPR LED Test] from the Misc test selection window.

11. Verify that the same number of the LEDs as the setting of the Dip switch S1 are ON.
(The LEDs and dip switch are located at the upper left side of the NPRM board.)

12. Click on [Close] to return to the Misc test selection window.

Safety Loop
This program can switch ON or OFF the relay for safety loop of the OC.

13. Click on [Safety Loop] from the Misc test selection window.

14. The message screen appears. Click on [OK] button.


The safety loop relay of the OC is in close position, so that OC safety loop is connected and the selector is ON.

15. Click on [Safety Loop] again to open the safety loop relay of the OC.

NOTICE
Before starting other test, the safety loop MUST return to the default setting. (The OC relay
is OPEN.)

16. Click on [Close] to return to the Misc test selection window.

2–10 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-5 MISC TEST (Continued)

Shutdown
This program shutdown the system.

17. Click on [Shutdown Test] from the Misc test selection window.
The system runs shutdown sequence automatically, then the system is down.

Note
If either of the relay of the front panel or DBPCI board is faulty, the system can NOT shut down.

2–11 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 33 2202123

2-6 WORKSTATION DEFAULT TEST


This includes the following main tests:

D Audio

D Monitor

D Mouse

Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Workstation Default Test].
The test selection window appears.

Note
To exit from [H/W Diagnostics] menu, the system must be rebooted so that the [Exit] button must be
used to shut down the system.

Audio Test
Click on audio icon. The same test window as audio function appears. For usage, refer to 2-4 Audio Function Test.

Monitor Test
Click on monitor icon. The monitor pattern list appears. Select any pattern and verify that appropriate pattern can
be shown.

Mouse Test
Click on mouse icon. The mouse image appears on the screen. Press any mouse key to verify that the proper key
on the screen is highlighted.

Move the mouse to verify that the mouse image on the screen moves to the same direction.

2–12 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 29 2202123

GANTRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 POWER SUPPLIES ON STATIONARY FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

SECTION 2 – ROTATIONAL MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS . . . . 2–1
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-5 RF SHOE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-6 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-7 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19

SECTION 3 – ROTATIONAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 MOVEMENT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-3 ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-4 ROTATION SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6

SECTION 4 – SLIP RINGS AND BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1


4-1 CAUTION AND NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-3 SIGNAL AND POWER BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4-4 SLIP RING CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4-4-1 RF Slip Ring Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4-4-2 HSDCD Slip Ring Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19

SECTION 5 – TILT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1


5-1 ROTATION CHECK WHILE TILTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 TILT ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-1 Tilt Rollers (For Non–Mobile System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-2 Tilt Rollers (For Mobile System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5-3 TILT SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5-4 TILT ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5-4-1 Tilt Angle Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5-4-2 Tilt Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5-5 TILT BWD LOCK SWITCH POSITION (FOR MOBILE SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14

i GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 29 2202123

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 6 – COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1


6-1 APERTURE RATIO (FOR SINGLE DETECTOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 APERTURE RATIO (FOR TWIN SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6-3 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
6-4 APERTURE Z–AXIS BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13

SECTION 7 – TABLE AND GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1


7-1 TABLE POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7-2-1 Halogen Positioning Lights (NP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7-2-2 Laser Positioning Lights (NP+/NP++/Twin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-1 Table Up, Down, Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-2 Table In, Out, Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-3 Move to Scan, Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-4 Tilt Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-5 POSN Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7-3-6 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7-4 TABLE AND GANTRY INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20

ii GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

SECTION 1 – DC POWER SUPPLIES

1-1 POWER SUPPLIES ON STATIONARY FRAME


Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.

1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove the front and left side covers.

3. Check DC power supply voltages on the TGP Board and SUB board, according to Table 1–1 by referring to il-
lustration 1–1. Adjust the Power Supplies PS1 and PS2 if necessary.

Illustration 1–1 Stationary Gantry Voltage Adjustment

Adjusting GANTRY LEFT SIDE TP1


Potentiometer
PS3 TP2
PS1/PS2/PS3

SUB BOARD
PS2

TP5 TP4
PS1
TP6
TGP BOARD
TP7
TP2

Table 1–1 Power Supply Specifications

DC Measuring Points SPECIFICATION


VOLTAGE
Board (High) (Low)
+5 V TGP TP4(+5V) TP5(+DGND) PS1: 5V ± 0.1V (check/adjustment)
+24 V SUB TP1(GNT24V) TP2(COM) PS2: 24.0V ± 0.5V (check/adjustment) (NP/NP+)
PS3: 24.0V ± 0.5V (check/adjustment) (NP++/Twin)
+24 V TGP TP2(+24V) TP5(+DGND) PS2: 24 V ± 0.6 V (checking only) (NP/NP+)
PS2: 24 V ± 0.6 V (check/adjustment) (NP++/Twin)
+15 V TGP TP6(+15V) TP5(+DGND) PS1: +15 V ± 0.9 V (checking only)
– 15V TGP TP7(–15V) TP5(+DGND) PS1: –15 V ± 0.9 V (checking only)

1–1 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME


Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.

1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove the front and right side Gantry covers.

3. Switch ON the Service Switch, then Rotate the Gantry to the 270_ tube position.

4. Switch OFF the Service Switch.

5. Remove the Power Supply PS L Cover by unscrewing nuts. (Refer to illustration 1–2)

6. Disconnect the OGP, DTRF and RF power cables connectors.

7. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

8. Measure and adjust if necessary, the potentiometers of the Power Supply according to the table 1–1. The poten-
tiometer positions is shown in the illustration 1–2.

Illustration 1–2 Power Supply PS L Voltage Adjustment

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
PS1

ÀÀ
À
ÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
À
ÉÉÉ
ÀÀ
PS2

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
À
ÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉÀÀ
É
PS3

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
À
ÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
À
ÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
À
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÉÀÀ
É
À ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
ÉÉÉÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
É ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
PS4

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
À
ÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
ÀÀ À
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
À
ÀÀ
ÉÉÉÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀ
É ÀÀ
À ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
À
ÀÀ
À
ÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ À
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀ À ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ À ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
À
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
NUTS

The denominations PS1 ∼ PS4 are only for reference in this procedure. They do not correspond to
the part name in Renewal Parts.

1–2 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123

1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME (continued)

Table 1–1 Power Supply Specifications

Adjustment Measuring Points Connector Voltage Range


Pins
PS1 (A) and (B) , or OGP PS Connector 3&4 24 ∼ 24.2V
5&6 24 ∼ 24.2V
PS2 (C) , or OGP PS Connector 1&2 4.9 ∼ 5.1V
PS3 (D) , or DTRF PS Connector 5.0 ∼ 5.2V
PS4 (E) , or RF PS Connector 14.35 ∼ 15.85

(A) 24V

PS1

(B) 24V
OGP PS

PS2

(C) 5V

PS3 DTRF PS

(D) 5V

PS4 RF PS

(E) 15V
CAUTION !
AC115V POTENTIOMETER

Illustration 1–3 Measuring Point for RF Power Supply Adjustment


9. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

1–3 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2202123

1–4 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 20 2202123

SECTION 2 – ROTATIONAL MECHANISM

2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS

WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD !
WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON AND SMALL BUTTON),
THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE –14 DEG. POSITION. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO
PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH OFF THE
‘ROTATE’ SWITCH FIRST.

Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.

1. Preparation:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring’ switches at the Gantry rear Base.

b. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers of the Gantry.

c. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.

2. Verify that the clearance between each rotating component part and all fixed parts is more than 10mm, while
rotating the Gantry in the CW direction by hand.

3. Check to make sure that the cables does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.

Illustration 2–1 Clearance between Rotational and Stationary Components

more than 10mm


more than 10mm
more than 10mm

more than 7mm

more than 10mm

2–1 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 20 2202123

2-2 ROTATION BALANCE

Special Equipment
D Spring Balance (Fish Scale) included in the SV Tool Set.

WARNING
MECHANICAL HAZARD !
FAILURE TO HOLD THE GANTRY USING THE AZIMUTH LOCK PIN PRIOR TO REMOVING
COMPONENTS MAY LEAD TO GANTRY MOTION WHICH CAN STRIKE A PERSON CAUSING
INJURY OR DEATH.

Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.


1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers of the Gantry.

Illustration 2–2 Gantry Balance Weight Locations

For System with D3142T Tube

Spare Weights
(under the bottom cover)
Main Weight
(0.5kg)

Side Weight (0.5kg)

For System with D3152TI Tube

Rear Weights
(Max. 4kg)

Center Weights
(Max. 4kg) DAS Assy

Front Weights
(Max. 4kg)

Side Weight (0.5kg)

2–2 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 20 2202123

2-2 ROTATION BALANCE (continued)


2. Perform the rough weight balance check/adjustment by observing the free movement:

a. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.

b. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight (under the DAS Assy) reaches the 6 o’clock position.

c. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.

If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, increase the side weight by 2 kg (0.5kg x 4).
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, decrease the side weight by 2 kg (0.5kg x 4).

d. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.

e. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight (near the OGP Assy) reaches the 6 o’clock position.

f. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.

If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, decrease the main weight by 2 kg (0.5kg x 4).
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, increase the main weight by 2 kg (0.5kg x 4).

Note
Adjust (decrease/increase) the main weights in the following order (see illustration 2–2):
decrease increase
For System with D3142T Tube: Front Weights Rear Weights
↓ ↓
Center Weights Center Weights
↓ ↓
Rear Weights Front Weights
For System with D3152T Tube: Rear Weights Front Weights
↓ ↓
Center Weights Center Weights
↓ ↓
Front Weights Rear Weights

g. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.

Illustration 2–3 Rough Weight Balance

CCW CW CCW CW

Main Weight

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
Side Weight
ÂÂ
ÂÂ 70°
Main Weight Side Weight

2–3 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 20 2202123

2-2 ROTATION BALANCE (continued)


3. Perform the fine weight balance check/adjustment using a spring balance:

a. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight reaches the 12 o’clock position.

b. Measure the force (F1 and F2) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring balance.

If the value ( F2–F1 ) is positive, increase the weight in the Side Weight.
If the value is negative, decrease the weight in the Side Weight.

c. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight reaches the 6 o’clock position.

d. Measure the force (F3 and F4) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring balance.

If the value ( F4–F3 ) is positive, increase the weight in the Main Weight.
If the value is negative, decrease the weight in the Main Weight.

4. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.

5. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–4 Gantry Static Balance Force Measurements

F1 F2

ÂÂ
ÂÂ F3

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
F4

ÂÂ
Side Weight Main Weight

| F2–F1 | Balance Weight(s) | F4–F3 | Balance Weight(s)


0.0 ∼ 0.4 – – 0.0 ∼ 0.4 – –
0.6 ∼ 1.2 1 pcs. (0.5kg) 0.6 ∼ 1.4 1 pcs. (0.5kg)
1.4 ∼ 2.2 2 pcs. (1.0kg) 1.6 ∼ 2.4 2 pcs. (1.0kg)
2.4 ∼ 3.0 3 pcs. (1.5Kg) 2.6 ∼ 3.6 3 pcs. (1.5Kg)
3.2 ∼ 3.8 4 pcs. (2.0Kg) 3.8 ∼ 4.6 4 pcs. (2.0Kg)
4.0 ∼ 4.8 5 pcs. (2.5kg) 4.8 ∼ 5.8 5 pcs. (2.5kg)

2–4 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 20 2202123

2-3 G. PULSE POSITION


Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.

1. Preparation:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry rear and left maintenance covers.

c. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.

d. Push the Emergency Reset switch on the TGP board.

2. Rotate the Gantry in the CW direction by hand until LED on the G. Pulse1 sensor turn OFF (on the stationary rear
side). Refer to illustration 2–5.

3. Measure the angle of the collimator plate. Verify that the angle is –1.0 ±0.5 deg.

4. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.

5. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–5 G. Pulse Photo Sensor Location

Photo Sensor LED


(G. Pulse 1)

Plate Plate

Gantry Frame

Photo Sensor
(G. Pulse 2)

TGP BOARD
Emergency Reset RESET
(EMRG RESET)
TEST1

TEST2

2–5 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 20 2202123

2-3 G. PULSE POSITION (continued)

Illustration 2–6 Photo Sensor & Plate Position

(TOP or BOTTOM VIEW)

Photo Sensor

Plate

6mm ± 0.5mm

(Side VIEW)
Photo Sensor
Plate
(G. Pulse 1)
(Stationary)
–1 deg. Gantry Position→ Plate (Stationary)
Photo Sensor (Rotational)
H
(G. Pulse 2) A
(Rotational)